Dc600 crane drive-firmware-manual
Upcoming SlideShare
Loading in...5
×
 

Dc600 crane drive-firmware-manual

on

  • 1,191 views

 

Statistics

Views

Total Views
1,191
Slideshare-icon Views on SlideShare
1,191
Embed Views
0

Actions

Likes
0
Downloads
11
Comments
0

0 Embeds 0

No embeds

Accessibility

Categories

Upload Details

Uploaded via as Adobe PDF

Usage Rights

© All Rights Reserved

Report content

Flagged as inappropriate Flag as inappropriate
Flag as inappropriate

Select your reason for flagging this presentation as inappropriate.

Cancel
  • Full Name Full Name Comment goes here.
    Are you sure you want to
    Your message goes here
    Processing…
Post Comment
Edit your comment

    Dc600 crane drive-firmware-manual Dc600 crane drive-firmware-manual Document Transcript

    • DCS 600 CraneDrive Firmware Manual DCC 600 Crane Application Program 1.1 for DCS 600 DC Converters
    • DCC 600 Crane Application Program 1.1 for DCS 600 DC Converters Firmware Manual 3AST000953R0125 EN EFFECTIVE: 2000-06-21 SUPERSEDES: None2000 ABB Automation Systems AB, Crane Systems. All Rights Reserved
    • Safety InstructionsOverview These safety instructions must be followed when installing, operating and servicing the DCC 600. If neglected, physical injury and death may follow, or damage may occur to the DC converter, the motor and driven equipment. The material in this chapter must be studied before attempting any work on, or with the unit.Warnings and Notes This manual distinguishes between two sorts of safety instructions. Warnings are used to inform of conditions that can, if proper steps are not taken, lead to a serious fault condition, physical injury and death. Notes are used when the reader is required to pay special attention or when there is additional information available on the subject. Notes are less crucial than Warnings, but should not be disregarded.Warnings Readers are informed of situations that can result in serious physical injury and/or serious damage to equipment with the following symbols: Dangerous Voltage Warning: warns of situations in which a high voltage can cause physical injury and/or can damage equipment. The text next to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger. General Warning: warns of situations that can cause physical injury and/or can damage equipment by means other than electrical. The text next to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger. Electrostatic Discharge Warning: warns of situations in which an electrostatic discharge can damage equipment. The text next to this symbol describes ways to avoid the danger.Notes Readers are notified of the need for special attention or additional information available on the subject with the following symbols: CAUTION! Caution aims to draw special attention to a particular issue. Note: Note gives additional information or points out more information available on the subject.DCC 600 Firmware Manual i
    • Safety InstructionsGeneral Safety Instructions These safety instructions are intended for all work on the DCC 600. WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work on the DCC 600 should be carried out by qualified electricians. The DCC 600 and adjoining equipment must be properly earthened. The DCC 600 motor cable terminals are at a dangerously high voltage when mains power is applied, regardless of motor operation. There can be dangerous voltages inside the DCC 600 from external control circuits when the DCC 600 mains power is shut off. Exercise appropriate care when working with the unit. Neglecting these instructions can cause physical injury and death. WARNING! The DCC 600 introduces electric motors, drive train mechanisms and driven machines to an extended operating range. It should be determined from the outset that all equipment is up to these conditions. All insulation tests must be carried out with the DCC 600 disconnected from the cabling. Operation outside the rated capacities should not be attempted. Neglecting these instructions can result in permanent damage to the DCC 600.ii DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Table of Contents1 Chapter 1 - Introduction to this Manual ...................................................................................... 1-1 1.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.2 Before You Start.................................................................................................................... 1-1 1.3 What This Manual Contains .................................................................................................. 1-1 1.4 Related Publications ............................................................................................................. 1-22 Chapter 2 – Handling of Control Panel CDP 312 ........................................................................ 2-1 2.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2 DCC 600 Parameter setting .................................................................................................. 2-1 2.2.1 Application Macros....................................................................................................... 2-1 2.2.2 Parameter Groups ....................................................................................................... 2-1 2.3 Control Panel ........................................................................................................................ 2-1 2.3.1 Display......................................................................................................................... 2-2 2.3.2 Keys ............................................................................................................................ 2-2 2.4 Panel Operation .................................................................................................................... 2-4 2.4.1 Keypad Modes............................................................................................................. 2-4 2.4.2 Operational Commands ............................................................................................. 2-133 Chapter 3 - Start-up ...................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 3-1 3.2 Start-up Procedure................................................................................................................ 3-1 3.3 Start-up Data......................................................................................................................... 3-6 3.3.1 Start-up Data Parameters ............................................................................................ 3-6 3.4 Autotuning............................................................................................................................. 3-8 3.4.1 Armature Current Controller......................................................................................... 3-8 3.4.2 Field Current Controller.............................................................................................. 3-10 3.5 Manual Tuning .................................................................................................................... 3-11 3.5.1 Square Wave Generator ............................................................................................ 3-11 3.5.2 Test Reference Selection........................................................................................... 3-12 3.5.3 Manual Tuning of the Speed Loop ............................................................................. 3-12 3.5.4 Manual Tuning of Field Exciters ................................................................................. 3-12 3.5.5 Manual Tuning of Armature Current Controller........................................................... 3-12 3.5.6 Manual Tuning of the EMF-Controller ........................................................................ 3-13 3.6 Memory Handling ................................................................................................................ 3-13 3.6.1 Converter Type Change............................................................................................. 3-13 3.6.2 Software Update ........................................................................................................ 3-134 Chapter 4 - Control Operation ..................................................................................................... 4-1 4.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 4-1 4.2 Actual Signals (Group 1) ....................................................................................................... 4-1 4.3 Description of the Actual Signals (Group 1)........................................................................... 4-3 4.4 Int Actuals (Group 2) ............................................................................................................. 4-5 4.5 Fieldbus Words (Group 3) ..................................................................................................... 4-6 4.6 Information Signals (Group 4) ............................................................................................... 4-6 4.7 Drive Logic Sigs (Group 6) .................................................................................................... 4-7 4.8 Fault History.......................................................................................................................... 4-8 4.9 Local Control vs. External Control ......................................................................................... 4-8 4.9.1 Keypad Control ............................................................................................................ 4-8 4.9.2 External Control ........................................................................................................... 4-9DCC 600 Firmware Manual iii
    • Table of Contents5 Chapter 5 - Crane Program Description ...................................................................................... 5-1 5.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 5-1 5.2 Application Macros ................................................................................................................ 5-1 5.3 Stand alone mode operation.................................................................................................. 5-2 5.3.1 Input and Output I/O Signals ........................................................................................ 5-2 5.3.2 External Connections ................................................................................................... 5-3 5.3.3 Control Signals Connection Stand Alone mode............................................................ 5-5 5.3.4 Parameter Settings for the Stand alone mode.............................................................. 5-6 5.4 Fieldbus mode operation ....................................................................................................... 5-8 5.4.1 Input and Output I/O Signals ........................................................................................ 5-8 5.4.2 External Connections ................................................................................................... 5-9 5.4.3 Control Signals Connection in Field Bus Mode........................................................... 5-10 5.4.4 Speed correction in Fieldbus mode ............................................................................ 5-11 5.4.5 Parameter Settings for the Fieldbus mode ................................................................. 5-12 5.5 Function Block Diagram ...................................................................................................... 5-14 5.6 Function Module Description ............................................................................................... 5-15 5.6.1 Local operation ( 60 ) ................................................................................................. 5-15 5.6.2 Speed monitor ( 61 ) .................................................................................................. 5-16 5.6.3 Torque monitor (62) ................................................................................................... 5-16 5.6.4 Fast stop ( 63 )........................................................................................................... 5-17 5.6.5 Crane ( 64 )................................................................................................................ 5-18 5.6.6 Logic handler ( 65 ) .................................................................................................... 5-25 5.6.7 Torque proving (66).................................................................................................... 5-28 5.6.8 Mechanical brake control ( 67) ................................................................................... 5-29 5.6.9 Power optimisation ( 68 )............................................................................................ 5-31 5.6.10 Reference handler ( 69) ........................................................................................... 5-33 5.6.11 Position measurement ( 70 ) .................................................................................... 5-35 5.6.12 Field bus communication and Fieldbus words ( 71 )................................................. 5-36 5.6.13 Shared motion (80) .................................................................................................. 5-44 5.6.14 Master/Follower ( 72 ) .............................................................................................. 5-45 5.7 User Macros ........................................................................................................................ 5-516 Chapter 6 – DC Converter Functions .......................................................................................... 6-1 6.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 6-1 6.2 Diagrams............................................................................................................................... 6-2 6.3 Start and stop sequences Fieldbus mode.............................................................................. 6-5 6.3.1 Start the drive............................................................................................................... 6-5 6.3.2 Stop the drive............................................................................................................... 6-6 6.4 Field Excitation ...................................................................................................................... 6-7 6.4.1 Field exciter type selection ........................................................................................... 6-8 6.4.2 Internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1 ...................................................................... 6-8 6.4.3 Internal field exciter SDCS-FEX-2 ................................................................................ 6-8 6.4.4 External field exciters DCF503/504 .............................................................................. 6-8 6.4.5 Two field exciters at the same time, field current references ........................................ 6-9 6.4.6 Settings........................................................................................................................ 6-9 6.4.7 Field Reduction on Stand-Still ...................................................................................... 6-9 6.4.8 Field Heating at "OFF"-State ...................................................................................... 6-10 6.4.9 Field current / motor FLUX linearisation ..................................................................... 6-11 6.5 EMF - Controller .................................................................................................................. 6-13 6.5.1 Selection of EMF - controller ...................................................................................... 6-13 6.5.2 Field weakening area ................................................................................................. 6-13 6.6 ANALOG AND DIGITAL I/O ................................................................................................ 6-14 6.6.1 I/O-Board Configuration ............................................................................................. 6-14 6.6.2 Digital Inputs .............................................................................................................. 6-14 6.6.3 Analogue Inputs ......................................................................................................... 6-15 6.6.4 Analogue Outputs ...................................................................................................... 6-17iv DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Table of Contents 6.6.5 I/O-Extention Board ................................................................................................... 6-18 6.7 DC-Breaker (Option) ........................................................................................................... 6-19 6.8 Shared motion..................................................................................................................... 6-19 6.9 Power loss monitoring and auto-reclosing ........................................................................... 6-20 6.9.1 Short Power Loss ...................................................................................................... 6-20 6.10 Earth fault monitoring ........................................................................................................ 6-21 6.11 Monitoring functions .......................................................................................................... 6-21 6.11.1 Speed Measurement Supervision ............................................................................ 6-21 6.12 Motor protection ................................................................................................................ 6-22 6.12.1 Measured Motor Temperature ................................................................................. 6-22 6.12.2 Motor Thermal Model............................................................................................... 6-23 6.12.3 Klixon....................................................................................................................... 6-26 6.12.4 Armature Overvoltage.............................................................................................. 6-277 Chapter 7 - Parameters ................................................................................................................ 7-1 7.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 7-1 7.2 Parameter Groups................................................................................................................. 7-1 7.2.1 Group 10 Digital Inputs ................................................................................................ 7-2 7.2.2 Group 13 Analogue Inputs ........................................................................................... 7-4 7.2.3 Group 14 I/O Outputs................................................................................................... 7-5 7.2.4 Group 15 Drive Logic ................................................................................................... 7-8 7.2.5 Group 16 System Ctr Inputs....................................................................................... 7-12 7.2.6 Group 17 Test Gen Par.............................................................................................. 7-14 7.2.7 Group 20 Limits ......................................................................................................... 7-15 7.2.8 Group 23 Speed Ctrl .................................................................................................. 7-16 7.2.9 Group 24 Torque Ctrl ................................................................................................. 7-19 7.2.10 Group 28 Motor Protection....................................................................................... 7-20 7.2.11 Group 30 Fault Functions......................................................................................... 7-24 7.2.12 Group 40 Undervolt Monit ........................................................................................ 7-25 7.2.13 Group 41 Motor Nom Val ......................................................................................... 7-26 7.2.14 Group 42 Measurement ........................................................................................... 7-28 7.2.15 Group 43 Current Control......................................................................................... 7-30 7.2.16 Group 44 Field Excitation......................................................................................... 7-31 7.2.17 Group 46 EMF Control............................................................................................. 7-32 7.2.18 Group 50 Speed Measuring ..................................................................................... 7-33 7.2.19 Group 51 Master Adapter......................................................................................... 7-34 7.2.20 Group 60 Local operation......................................................................................... 7-34 7.2.21 Group 61 Speed monitor.......................................................................................... 7-35 7.2.22 Group 62 Torque Monitor......................................................................................... 7-36 7.2.23 Group 63 Fast stop .................................................................................................. 7-37 7.2.24 Group 64 Crane ....................................................................................................... 7-38 7.2.25 Group 65 Logic handler ........................................................................................... 7-41 7.2.26 Group 66 Torque Proving......................................................................................... 7-42 7.2.27 Group 67 Mechanical brake contr. ........................................................................... 7-43 7.2.28 Group 68 Power optimisation................................................................................... 7-44 7.2.29 Group 69 Reference Handler ................................................................................... 7-46 7.2.30 Group 70 Position measurement.............................................................................. 7-48 7.2.31 Group 71 Fieldbus Comm ........................................................................................ 7-49 7.2.32 Group 72 Master/Follower........................................................................................ 7-50 7.2.33 Group 80 Shared motion.......................................................................................... 7-55 7.2.34 Group 92 Dataset TR Addr ...................................................................................... 7-59 7.2.35 Group 98 Option modules ........................................................................................ 7-60 7.2.36 Group 99 Start-up Data............................................................................................ 7-618 Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance................................................................................ 8-1 8.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................... 8-1DCC 600 Firmware Manual v
    • Table of Contents 8.2 Display of status, alarm and fault signals............................................................................... 8-3 8.3 General messages ................................................................................................................ 8-4 8.4 Starting errors (E) [from SDCS-CON-2 board] ....................................................................... 8-4 8.5 Fault Signals (F) .................................................................................................................... 8-5 8.6 Alarm Signals (A) ................................................................................................................ 8-12 8.7 Thyristor Diagnosis.............................................................................................................. 8-15 8.8 Supply Voltage Monitoring................................................................................................... 8-15 8.9 Watchdog Function.............................................................................................................. 8-16 8.10 Jumpers on the SCDS-CON-2 board................................................................................. 8-16 8.11 Fault and Event Logger ..................................................................................................... 8-16 8.12 Data Logger....................................................................................................................... 8-16 8.13 Maintenance...................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.13.1 Heatsink ................................................................................................................... 8-17 8.13.2 Fan........................................................................................................................... 8-18 A Appendix A - Complete Parameter and Default Settings ................................................... A-1 B Appendix B - User I/O Interface diagrams ........................................................................... B-1 Note: Instructions for Electrical and Mechanical installation are not included in this manual. They can be found from the DCS 600 Installation Manual.vi DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • 1 Chapter 1 - Intr oduction to this Manual1.1 Overview This chapter describes the purpose, contents and the intended audience of this manual. It also explains the conventions used in this manual and lists related publications. This DCC 600 User’s Manual is compatible with DCC 600 Application Software version DCAA1120. Software identification of DCS 600 CraneDrive: This software consist of three parts SDCS-CON-2 Motor Control Firmware 15.2xx (signal 4.11) SDCS-AMC-DC Motor control Firmware 15.6xx (signal 4.02) SDCS-AMC-DC Crane Application software DCAA1xxx (signal 4.03)1.2 Before You Start The purpose of this manual is to provide you with the information necessary to control and program your DCS 600 Crane Drive, from now on mentioned as DCC 600. The audience for this manual is expected to have: • Knowledge of standard electrical wiring practices, electronic components, and electrical schematic symbols. • Minimal knowledge of ABB product names and terminology.1.3 What This Manual Contains Safety Instructions can be found on pages i and ii of this manual. The Safety Instructions describe the formats for various warnings and notations used in this manual. This chapter also states the general safety instructions which must be followed. Chapter 1 – Introduction, the chapter you are reading now, introduces you to the DCC 600 User’s Manual and conventions used throughout the manual. Chapter 2 – Handling of Control Panel CDP 312 provides an overview of handling your DCC 600 with the control panel. This chapter describes the operation of the CDP 312 Control Panel used for controlling, setting parameters and reading signals and fault logger data. Chapter 3 – Start-up gives a Start-up procedure and also lists and explains the Start-up Data parameters. Chapter 4 – Control Operation describes actual signals, keypad and external controls. Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description defines the Crane program by describing the included crane specific functions and presenting them in a block diagram. This chapter also describes the User Macro function. Chapter 6 – DC Converter Functions describes functions like e.g. Start and Stop sequence, Field excitation, EMF-controller and Analog & Digital I/O.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 1-1
    • Chapter 1 Introduction to this Manual Chapter 7 – Parameters lists all the DCC 600 parameters and explains the function of each parameter. Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing describes the fault tracing procedure when warnings and faults are indicated. Warnings and faults are listed in tabular form with possible causes and remedies. Appendix A - Complete Parameter and Default Settings lists, in tabular form, all parameter settings and the default values for the DCC 600. Appendix B - User I/O interface diagrams showing default I/O signal connections for Stand alone and Fieldbus modes.1.4 Related Publications In addition to this manual the DCC 600 user documentation includes the following manuals: • DCS 600 CraneDrive System Description • DCS 600 Technical Data • DCS 600 Installation Manual • DCS 600 Service Manual • Fieldbus adapters Installation & Start-up Guide (optional) • Drives Window User’s Manual (optional) New manuals will be prepared as more Option Modules and other optional extras become available. Please ask for them from the local ABB distributor.1-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • 2 Chapter 2 – Ha ndling of Control Panel CDP 3122.1 Overview This chapter describes the programming principles of the DCC 600 drive; the operation of the CDP 312 Control Panel; and how to use the panel with DCC 600 to modify parameters, measure actual values and control the drive(s).2.2 DCC 600 Parameter setting The user can change the configuration of the DCC 600 to meet the needs of the requirements by setting parameter values.2.2.1 Application Macros Parameters can be set one by one or a preprogrammed set of parameters can be selected. Preprogrammed parameter sets are called Application Macros. Refer to Chapter 5 - Crane Program Description for further information on Application Macros.2.2.2 Parameter Groups In order to simplify programming, parameters of the DCC 600 drive are organised into logical Groups. Parameters of the Start-Up Data Group are described in Chapter 3 – Start-up Data and other parameters in Chapter 7 - Parameters. Signals are described in chapter 4. Start-up Data Parameters The Start-up Data parameters (Group 99) contains the basic settings needed to match the DCC 600 with your motor. This group also contains a list of preprogrammed Application Macros. The Start-up Data Group includes parameters that are set at start-up and should not need to be changed later on. Refer to Chapter 3 – Start-up Data for description of each parameter. The Start-up Data Group is displayed as the first parameter group in the Parameter Mode. The correct procedure for selecting a parameter and changing its value is described in paragraph Table 2-6 Keypad Modes - Parameter Mode. Parameters are described in Chapter 7 - Parameters.2.3 Control Panel The CDP 312 Control Panel is the device used for locally controlling and programming the DCS 600. The Panel can be attached directly to the door of the cabinet or it can be mounted, for example, in a control desk.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 2-1
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Panel Link The CDP312 Drives Panel is connected to the drive through a Modbus communication bus. It is connected with an electrical cable or an adapter to connectors X33 or X34 situated on the control board SDCS-CON-2. Modbus, which is based on the RS485 standard, is a common bus protocol for ABB Drives products. The communication speed is 9600 bit/s. 1 6L " ZW 330 0.0 rpm =://. LED PANE ! % 0 ZW >9<;?/ MOTOR SP   0.0 rpm -?<</8> MOTOR TO  + 0.00 % ACT PAR FUNC DRIVE ENTER LOC RESET REF REM 0 CDP 312 Figure 2-1 CDP 312 Control Panel2.3.1 Display The LCD type display has 4 lines of 20 characters. The Control Panel display is an LCD type display of drive functions, drive parameter selections, and other drive information. Letters or numbers appear on the display according to which Control Panel keys are pressed. The language for display of texts on the CDP 312 Control Panel is English.2.3.2 Keys The 16 Control Panel keys are flat, labeled, push-button keys that allow you to monitor drive functions, select drive parameters, and change drive macros and settings.2-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Actual Signal Display Mode  6 ZW  =://. ! ZW ACT >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + Parameter Mode  6 ZW   +8+691?/ 38:?>= PAR  =-+6/ +3   6 ZW  Function Mode ?:69+. && .9A869+. (( FUNC -98><+=>  .-= Drive Selection Mode 3. 8?7,/<  DRIVE .-++##  >9>+6  .<3@/= Figure 2-2 Control Panel Display indications and function of the Control Panel keys. LOC Keypad / Forward On Start REM External Control RESET Fault Reset Reverse Off Stop 0 REF Reference Setting Function Figure 2-3 Operational commands of the Control Panel keys.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 2-3
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel2.4 Panel Operation The outlook of the Control Panel Keys and the Display Modes are shown in Figures 2-1, 2-2 and 2-3 (see section 2.3 obove). The following is a description of the operation of the CDP 312 Control Panel.2.4.1 Keypad Modes The CDP 312 Control Panel has four different keypad modes: Actual Signal Display Mode, Parameter Mode, Function Mode, and Drive Selection Mode. In addition to this there is a special Identification Display, which is displayed after connecting the panel to the link. The Identification Display and the keypad modes are described briefly below. Identification Display When the panel is connected for the first time, or the power is applied to the drive, the Identification Display appears showing the panel ID number and the number of drives connected to the link. Note: The panel can be connected to the drive while power is applied to the drive. -.: :+8/6 3. 8?7,/<  >9>+6  .<3@/= After two seconds, the display will clear, and the Actual Signals of the selected drive will appear. Actual Signal Display Mode This mode includes two displays, the Actual Signal Display and the Fault History Display. The Actual Signal Display is displayed first when the Actual Signal Display mode is entered. If the drive is in a fault condition, the Fault Display will be shown first. The panel will automatically return to Actual Signal Display Mode from other modes if no keys are pressed within one minute (exceptions: Status Display in Drive Selection Mode and Fault Display Mode). In the Actual Signal Display Mode you can monitor three Actual Signals at a time. For more information of actual signals refer to Chapter 4 Control Operation. How to select the three Actual Signals to the display is explained in Table 2-3, page 2-6. The Fault History includes information on the 24 most recent faults that have occurred in your DCC 600. The name of the fault and the total power-on time are displayed. If the AC80 overriding system has been connected to the drive (DDCS channel 0), this time can be seen in the date format instead of power-on time. The procedure for clearing the Fault History is described in Table 2-4, page 2-7.2-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel The following table shows the events that are stored in the Fault History. For each event it is described what information is included. Table 2-1 Events stored in the Fault History Event Information Display A fault is detected by Sequential number of the event. DCC 600 Name of the fault and a “+” sign  6 ZW in front of the name. Total power  6+=> 0+?6> on time or date and time updated 9@/<@96>+1/ by overriding system.  2  738  = A fault is reset by user. Sequential number of the event. -RESET FAULT text.  6 ZW Total power on time or date and  6+=> 0+?6> time updated by overriding </=/> 0+?6> system.  2  738  = A warning is activated by Sequential number of the event. DCC 600 Name of the fault and a “+” sign  6 ZW in front of the name. Total power  6+=> A+<8381 on time or date and time updated 49C=>3-5 by overriding system.  2  738  = A warning is deactivated Sequential number of the event. by DCC 600 Name of the warning and a “-”  6 ZW sign in front of the name. Total  6+=> A+<8381 power on time or date and time 49C=>3-5 updated by overriding system.  2  738  = When a fault or warning occurs in the drive, the message will be displayed immediately, except in Drive Selection Mode. Table 2-5, page 2-7, shows how to reset a fault. Refer to chapter 8 for information on fault tracing. From the fault display, it is possible to change to other displays without resetting the fault. If no keys are pressed the fault or warning text is displayed as long as the fault exists.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 2-5
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Table 2-2 How to display the full name of the three Actual Signals. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To display the full name of Hold  6 ZW  the three actual ACT 79>9< =://. 036> signals 79>9< >9<;?/ 036> 79>9< -?<</8> 2. To return to the Actual Signal Release Display Mode  6 ZW  ACT =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + Table 2-3 How to select Actual Signals to the display. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode  6 ZW  ACT =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + 2. To select the desired row.  6 ZW  =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + 3. To enter the Actual Signal Selection Mode.  6 ZW  ENTER  +->?+6 =318+6=  >9<;?/   4. To select a different group.  6 ZW   38> =318+6=  =: </0  ! ZW 5. To select an index.  6 ZW   38> =318+6=  =: </0  ! ZW 6a. To accept the selection and to return to the Actual Signal  6 ZW  Display Mode. ENTER =://. ! ZW or =: </0  ! ZW -?<</8>  + 6b. To cancel the selection and keep the original selection, ACT PAR  6 ZW  press any of the Mode keys. =://. ! ZW The selected Keypad Mode is >9<;?/   entered. FUNC DRIVE -?<</8>  +2-6 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Table 2-4 How to display a fault and reset the Fault History. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode  6 ZW  ACT =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + 2. To enter the Fault History Display.  6 ZW  Logging time can be seen either  6+=> 0+?6> total power-on time or in the 9@/<-?<</8> date format, if overriding system  2  738  = (ex. AC80) has been connected to control the drive. 3. To select previous (UP) or next fault (DOWN).  6 ZW   6+=> 0+?6> 9@/<@96>+1/  2  738  = To clear the Fault History.  6 ZW  RESET  6+=> 0+?6> After the fault text there is letter r or s indicating the status of the 2 738 = fault: s = set r = reset The Fault History is empty. Note! An active fault does not clear a fault in the logger 4. To return to the Actual Signal Display Mode.  6 ZW  =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + Table 2-5 How to display and reset an active fault. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To enter the Actual Signal Display Mode.  6 ZW  ACT .-=  ! UA  0+?6>  -98@ >/7: 2. To reset the fault. Reset button can also be used in the  6 ZW  REMOTE mode. RESET =://. ZW >9<;?/  -?<</8> +DCC 600 Firmware Manual 2-7
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control PanelParameter Mode The Parameter Mode is used to make changes to the DCC 600 parameters. When this mode is entered for the first time after power up, the display will show the first parameter of the first group. Next time the Parameter Mode is entered, the previously selected parameter is shown. NOTE: If you try to write to a write-protected parameter, the following warning will be displayed:  A+<8381  A<3>/ +--/== ./83/. :+<+7/>/< =/>>381 89> :9==3,6/ Table 2-6 How to select a parameter and change the value. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To enter the Parameter Mode Selection  6 ( ZW  PAR  +8+691?/ 38:?>=  =-+6/ +3  2. To select another parameter group.  6 ( ZX   +8+691?/ 38:?>= While holding the arrow down,  =-+6/ +3 only the group name and  number are displayed. When the key is released, name, number  6 ZW  and value of the first parameter  39 9?>:?>= in the group is displayed.  .9 9?>:?> ,<+5/ 630> 3. To select an index.  6 ZW  While holding the arrow down,  39 9?>:?>= only the parameter name and  .9" 9?>:?> number are displayed. When the 0+?6>8 key is released the value of the parameter is also displayed. 4. To enter the Parameter Setting Mode.  6 ZW  ENTER  39 9?>:?>=  .9" 9?>:?> E0+?6>8G 5. To change the parameter value. (slow change)  6 ZW   39 9?>:?>= (fast change)  .9" 9?>:?> E-98><96 69-G 6a. To send a new value to the drive.  6 ZW  ENTER  39 9?>:?>= or  .9" 9?>:?> -98><96 69- 6b. To cancel the new setting and ACT PAR keep the original value.  6 ZW   +8+691?/ 38:?>= The selected Keypad Mode is FUNC DRIVE  =-+6/ +3 entered. 2-8 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Function Mode The Function Mode is used to select special functions. These functions include Parameter Upload, Parameter Download and setting the contrast of the CDP 312 Control Panel display. Parameter Upload will copy all parameters and the results of motor UPLOAD DCC 600 identification from the drive to the panel. The upload function can be Drive performed while the drive is running. Only the OFF command can be DOWNLOAD given during the uploading process. By default, Parameter Download will copy existing parameter Groups 10 to 99 stored in the panel to the drive. Table 2-7, page 2-10, describes how to select and perform Parameter Upload and Parameter Download functions.  A+<8381  89> ?:69+./. .9A869+.381 89> :9==3,6/ Uploading has to be done before downloading. If downloading is attempted before uploading, the following warning will be displayed:  A+<8381  .<3@/ 38-97:+>3,6/ .9A869+.381 89> :9==3,6/ The parameters can be uploaded and downloaded only if the software version of the destination drive is the same as the software version of the source drive. Otherwise the following warning will be displayed:  A+<8381  .<3@/ 3= <?88381 .9A869+.381 89> :9==3,6/ The drive must be stopped during the downloading process. If the drive is running and downloading is selected, the following warning is displayed:DCC 600 Firmware Manual 2-9
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Table 2-7 How to select and perform a function. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To enter the Function Mode.  6 ZW FUNC ?:69+. && .9A869+. (( -98><+=>  2. To select a function (a flashing cursor indicates the selected  6 ZW function). ?:69+. && .9A869+. (( 3. To activate the selected function.  6 ZW ENTER ((((((( .9A869+. 4. Loading completed.  6 ZW =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + Table 2-8 How to set the contrast of the panel display. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To enter the Function Mode.  6 ZW FUNC ?:69+. && .9A869+. (( -98><+=>  2. To select a function.  6 ZW ?:69+. && .9A869+. (( -98><+=>  3. To enter contrast setting function.  6 ZW ENTER -98><+=> EG 4. To set the contrast. (0...7)  6 ZW -98><+=> E G 5a. To accept the selected value  6 ZW ENTER ?:69+. && or .9A869+. (( -98><+=> 5b. To cancel the new setting and keep the original value, press ACT PAR  6 ZW any of the Mode keys. ?:69+. && FUNC DRIVE .9A869+. (( The selected Keypad Mode is -98><+=>  entered.2-10 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Copying parameters from one unit to other units You can copy parameters 10...97 from one drive to another by using the Parameter Upload and Parameter Download functions in the Function Mode. Typically this kind of function can be used if the processes and the motor types are same. This procedure is permitted only if the sw- versions are the same. Follow the procedure below: 1. Select the correct options (Group 98) and macro (Group 99) for each drive. 2. Set the rating plate values for the motors (Group 99). 3. Set the parameters in Groups 10 to 97 as preferred in one DCC 600 drive. 4. Upload the parameters from the DCC 600 to the panel (see Table 2-7). 5. Disconnect the panel and reconnect it to the next DCC 600 unit. 6. Ensure the target DCC 600 is in Local control (L shown on the first row of the display). If necessary, change the control location by LOC pressing REM . 7. Download the parameters from the panel to the DCC 600 unit (see Table 2-7). 8. Repeat steps 5 and 6 for the rest of the units. Note: Parameters in Groups 98 and 99 concerning options, macro and motor data are not copied.1) Setting the contrast If the Control Panel Display is not clear enough, set the contrast according to the procedure explained in Table 2-8. 1) The restriction prevents downloading of incorrect motor data (Group 99). In special cases it is also possible to upload and download Groups 98 and 99. For more information, please contact your local ABB representative.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 2-11
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Drive Selection Mode In normal use the features available in the Drive Selection Mode are not needed; these features are reserved for applications where several drives are connected to one Modbus Link. Modbus Link is the communication link connecting the Control Panel and the DCC 600. Each on-line station must have an individual identification number (ID). By default, the ID number of the DCC 600 is 1. CAUTION! The default ID number setting of the DCC 600 should not be changed unless it is to be connected to the Modbus Link with other drives on-line. Table 2-9 How to select a drive and change ID number. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. To enter the Drive Selection Mode .-= DRIVE 3. 8?7,/<  .-++ ##  >9>+6  .<3@/= 2. To select the next view. .-= The ID number of the station is 3. 8?7,/<  changed by first pressing ENTER .-++ ##  (the brackets round the ID number >9>+6  .<3@/= appear) and then adjusting the value with arrow buttons . The new value is accepted with ENTER. The power of the DCC 600 must be switched off to validate its 1á 2Ñ 3Ü 4Ö 5Ö new ID number setting (the new 6á 7F 8Ö 9Ö 10Ö value is not displayed until the power is switched off and on. á The Status Display of all devices = Drive stopped, directioon forward connected to the Panel Link is Ñ = Drive running, direction reverse shown after the last individual F station. If all stations do not fit on = Drive has tripped on a fault the display at once, press to view rest of them. 3. To connect to the last displayed drive and enter another mode, press ACT  6 ZW  PAR one of the Mode keys. =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   The selected Keypad Mode is FUNC -?<</8>  + entered.2-12 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel2.4.2 Operational Commands Operational commands control the operation of the DCC 600. They include switching On and Off, starting and stopping the drive and adjusting the reference. The reference value is used for controlling the motor speed. Changing control Location Operational commands can be given from the CDP 312 Control Panel always when the status row is displayed and the control location is the panel. This is indicated by L (Local Control) on the display. See the following figure.  6 ZW Remote Control (control from the overriding system or I/O is indicated by empty field. See the following figure.  ZW Operational commands cannot be given from this panel when in Remote Control. Only monitoring actual signals, setting parameters, uploading and changing ID numbers is possible. The control is changed between Keypad and External control locations by pressing the LOC / REM key. Changing control location is only possible while motor is stopped. Only one of the Local Control devices (CDP 312 or Drives Window) can be used as the local control location at a time. Refer to Chapter 4 - Control Operation for the explanation of Keypad and External control. Direction of actual rotation is indicated by the reference sign.  ZW  ZW Forward ReverseOn, Off, Start, Stop and Reference On, Off, Start and Stop commands are given from the panel by pressing the keys On Forward Off Reverse Start Stop 0 Table 2-10 explains how to set the Reference from the panel.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 2-13
    • Chapter 2 Overview of DCC 600 Programming and the CDP 312 Control Panel Table 2-10 How to set the reference. Step Function Press key Display after key is pressed 1. Press one of these keys to get the status row displayed.  6 ZW  ACT PAR =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   FUNC -?<</8>  + 2. To enter the Reference Setting Mode  6 E ZWG  REF =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + 3. To change the reference, pos or neg.  6 E  ZWG  (slow change): =://.  ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + (fast change): 4. To exit the Reference Setting Mode.  6  ZW  ACT PAR =://.  ZW The selected Keypad Mode is >9<;?/   entered. FUNC DRIVE -?<</8>  + Note: Reverse speed is achieved by decreasing reference to a negative value.2-14 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • 3 Chapter 3 - Sta rt-up3.1 Overview This chapter lists and explains the Start-up Procedure and the Start-up Data Parameters. The Start-up Data Parameters are a special set of parameters that allow you to set up the DCC 600 and motor information. Start-up Data Parameters should only need to be set during start-up and should not need to be changed afterwards.3.2 Start-up Procedure The start-up procedure of DCC 600 converters equipped with CraneDrive Application Program is described in this chapter. WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this chapter should only be undertaken by a qualified electrician. The Safety Instructions on the first pages of this manual and appropriate hardware manual must be followed. Refer to Chapter 8 – Fault Tracing in case of trouble. START-UP FLOWCHART SAFETY t The start-up procedure should only be carried out by a qualified electrician. t Follow the safety instructions on the first pages of this manual during the start-up procedure. t Check the installation before the start-up procedure. Refer to Installation manual. t Check that starting the motor does not cause any danger. It is recommended having the driven equipment disengaged when first start is performed if there is the risk of damage to the driven equipment in case of incorrect rotation direction of the motor.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 3-1
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up START-UP FLOWCHART 1 – POWER-UP t Apply mains power. -.: :+8/6 3. 8?7,/<  >9>+6  .<3@/= The Control Panel enters the Identification Display.  6 ZW The Control Panel enters the Actual Signal Display Mode =://. ZW automatically in a few seconds. >9<;?/  -?<</8> + 2 – START-UP DATA ENTERING t Select the Application Macro.  6 ZW ## =>+<>?: .+>+ Press PAR key.  +::63-+>398 7+-<9 -<+8/  6 ZW Press ENTER. Square brackets appear around the ## =>+<>?: .+>+ parameter value. Scroll available options with and .  +::63-+>398 7+-<9 Accept the selection with ENTER. E-<+8/G A detailed description of the Application Macros is included in Chapter 5. 2 – START-UP DATA ENTERING3-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up START-UP FLOWCHART Enter the motor data from the motor nameplate. t MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE  6 ZW Motor nominal voltage ## =>+<>?: .+>+  79>9< 897 @96>+1/ E G Press PAR key. Press to move to Parameter 99.5. Press ENTER. Enter the value by and . Press ENTER. The value is used for scaling EMF-based measured / calculated actual speed (SPEED ACT EMF). Note: Enter exactly the value given on the nameplate. Repeat the procedure for the following parameters: t MOTOR NOM CURRENT  6 ZW Motor nominal current 99.6 ## =>+<>?: .+>+ 79>9< 897 -?<</8> Set equal to rated armature current. The value is used for E G scaling the armature current by means of measured converter current. t MOTOR NOM SPEED  6 ZW Nominal speed 99.8 ## =>+<>?: .+>+ Range: 1 … 18000 rpm " 79>9< 897 =://. Set the Nominal speed as rated speed given on the motor E G nameplate. (should be equal to fieldweakening speed of motor). t  6 ZW MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR  79>9< 897 @+6 Motor 1 nominal Field current 41.3. Set equal to rated field  79>  897 06. -?< current for motor 1. The value is used scaling the field E G current measurement. t MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR  6 ZW Motor 2 nominal Field current 41.17. Set equal to rated  79>9< 897 @+6 ! 79>  897 06. -?< field current for motor 2 (second motor in shared motion). E G The value is used scaling the field current measurement.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 3-3
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up START-UP FLOWCHART 3 – SELECT FIELD EXCITER TYPE & SUPPLY VOLTAGE & BRAKE I/O  6 ZW t Set type of field exciter(s) used.  .<3@/ 6913- USED FEX TYPE 15.5  ?=/. 0/B >C:/ See description of parameter 15.5 in chapter 7. E G t NOM SUPPLY VOLT  6 ZW Nominal supply voltage 42.6. Set equal to nominal AC  7/+=?</7/8> supply voltage used. 897 =?::6C @96> E G t Check Brake I/O parameter settings 10.1 and 14.1-14.5. 4 – ROTATION DIRECTION OF THE MOTOR t Increase the speed reference from zero to a small value:  6 ( E bbbGZW Press ACT, PAR or FUNC key to enter Keypad Mode with =://. bbbb ZW the status row visible. Change the Speed Reference value >9<;?/ bb  by pressing REF and then or . Press (Start) to -?<</8> bb + start the motor. Check that the motor is running in the desired direction. Stop the motor by pressing .3-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up 5 – SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES START-UP FLOWCHART 5 – SPEED LIMITS AND ACCELERATION/DECELERATION TIMES t Press PAR. Use and to scroll parameters. Minimum speed  6 ( ZW  6373>= Enter the value by ENTER and or . Press ENTER.  73837?7 =://. Repeat the procedure for the following parameters: E G Maximum speed  6 ( ZW  6373>=  7+B37?7 =://. E G Acceleration times  6 ( ZW # </0/</8-/ 2+8.6/<  +-- >37/ 09<A E G  6 ( ZW # </0/</8-/ 2+8.6/<  +-- >37/ </@ E G Deceleration times  6 ( ZW # </0/</8-/ 2+8.6/<  ./- >37/ 09<A E G  6 ( ZW # </0/</8-/ 2+8.6/<  ./- >37/ </@ For other parameters see Chapter 5 – Parameters, setting E G tables 5-1 and 5-2.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 3-5
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up3.3 Start-up Data3.3.1 Start-up Data Parameters To access the Start-up Data Parameters you must enter the Parameter Mode. The Start-up Data Parameters appear on the display (Parameter Group 99). After the Start-up parameters for the motor are set, the display shows the last edited Parameter Group when entering Parameter Mode and no longer returns to the Parameter Group 99. In the Start-up Data group there are parameters for selecting the Application Macro and the Motor Information Parameters containing the basic settings required to match the DCC 600 with your motor. When changing the value fo the Start-up Data Paramters, follow the procedure described in Chapter 2 – Overview of DCC 600 Programming, Table 1-6, page 1-8. Table 3-1, page 1-8, lists the Start-up Data Parameters. The Range/Unit column in Table 3-1 shows the parameter values, which are explained in detail below the table. WARNING! Running the motor and the driven equipment with incorrect start-up data can result in improper operation, reduction in control accuracy and damage to equipment. Table 3-1 Group 99, Start-up Data Parameters. Parameter Range/Unit Description 2 APPLICATION Application macros Application macro MACRO selection. 3 APPLIC NO; YES Restores parameters to RESTORE factory setting values. 5 MOTOR NOM 5.0 … 1800.0 V (printed Nominal voltage from the VOLTAGE on the motor motor rating plate. nameplate) 6 MOTOR NOM 0.0 … 10000.0 A Matches the DCC 600 to CURRENT (printed on the motor the rated motor current. nameplate) 8 MOTOR NOM 20.0 ... 7500.0 rpm Nominal speed from the SPEED (printed on the motor motor rating plate. nameplate) 9 DEVICE NAME - Name of drive section.3-6 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up Parameter Selection The following is a list of the Start-up Data Parameters with a description of each parameter. The motor data parameters 99.5 ... 99.8 are always to be set at start-up. 2 APPLICATION This parameter is used to select between the CRANE macro, for crane MACRO drive functions but not including Master/Follower bus communication, and the M/F CTRL macro with the crane drive functions plus Master/Follower bus communication.. Refer to Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description, for a description of the two available Macros. There is also a selection for saving the current parameter settings as a User Macro (USER 1 SAVE or USER 2 SAVE), and recalling these settings (USER 1 LOAD or USER 2 LOAD). Parameter group 99 is not included in application macros CRANE and M/F CTRL. The parameter settings in group 99 will remain the same even though the macro is changed to CRANE or M/F CTRL. NOTE: User Macro load restores also the motor settings of the Start-up Data group 99. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used. 3 APPLIC RESTORE Selection Yes restores the original settings of an application macro as follows: - If application macro CRANE or M/F CTRL is selected, the parameter values are restored to the settings loaded at the factory. Exceptions: Parameter setting in group 99 remain unchanged. - If User Macro 1 or 2 is selected, the parameter values are restored to the last saved values.5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE This parameter matches the DCC 600 with the nominal armature voltage of the motor as indicated on the motor rating plate.6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT This parameter matches the DCC 600 to the rated motor armature current. 8 MOTOR NOM This parameter matches the DCC 600 to the nominal speed as indicated SPEED on the motor rating plate = Field weakening point. 9 DEVICE NAME Name of drive section can be entered to this parameter using DrivesWindow.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 3-7
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up3.4 Autotuning3.4.1 Armature Current Controller The parameters of the armature current controller can be defined by using the autotuning function. After nominal values of the motor and the converter are programmed, the autotuning feature can be executed. The motor (and possibly the gear) are supposed to be free-running, and “Brake lift” plus “Brake acknowledge” are already in operation – if not, breaks have to be lifted manually before autotuning. Set panel in position “LOCAL”Single drive Suppose no Shared motion (Par. 16.6=OFF). a) Set parameter 15.02 (=DRIVE MODE) to 3. Note – Execute the next two steps within 20 seconds! b) Give ON-order. c) Give START-order Now wait – motor will start automatically, and also stop. d) Tuning is completed, when par. 15.02 changes back to zero. e) Give STOP-order. f) Give OFF-order. (If the drive trips during the autotuning, the program sets 15.02=-1, and the reason can be read on signal 6.02=COMMISS STATUS, see below). Note – The results from the autotuning can now be read in group 1: g) Read the following signals, and also note them down: 1.28=ARM L 1.29=ARM R 1.30=ARM CUR PI P-GAIN 1.31=ARM CUR PI I-GAIN 1.32=DISCONT CUR LIMIT h) Now enter the found values to the following parameters: 41.11=ARM L 41.12=ARM R 43.2=ARM CUR PI P-GAIN 43.3=ARM CUR PI I-GAIN 43.6=DISCONT CUR LIMIT i) Make a new init, that is, mains supply OFF-ON.Autotuning of Motor 1 when Shared motion • Parameter 16.6 (=SHARED MOTION SEL) has earlier been set to ‘ON’. • Parameter 15.5 (=USED FEX TYPE) has been set, with regard to Shared motion. • The converter is now connected to Motor 1. • Check that signal 1.11 (=MOTOR SELECTED) shows ‘MOTOR 1’. • Now execute points a)→i) under Single drive above. • Autotuning for Motor 1 is now ready, and found values have been written to actual parameters!3-8 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 3 - Start-upAutotuning of Motor 2 when Shared motion • Suppose one of the following alternatives: Alt. 1 The fieldbus is in operation, and the converter has been ordered (from fieldbus) to change to Motor 2-parameters. Alt. 2 The fieldbus is not yet in operation. The converter has to be ordered to go to Motor 2-parameters by setting par. 16.6 to ‘FORCE MOT 2’. • Parameter 15.5 (=USED FEX TYPE) has been set=4. • The converter is connected to Motor 2. • Check that signal 1.11 (=MOTOR SELECTED) Shows ‘MOTOR 2’. • Now execute points a)→g) under Single drive. (Note – not points h) and i). • Enter the found values to the following parameters: 80.10=ARM L 2 80.11=ARM R 2 80.13=ARM CUR PI PGAIN2 80.14=ARM CUR PI IGAIN2 80.15=DISCOUNT CUR LIM 2 • If par. 16.6 was changed to ‘FORCE MOT 2’ above, now change it back to ‘ON’. • Make a new init, that is, mains supply OFF-ON. • Autotuning for Motor 2 is now ready, and found values have been written to actual parameters in group 80! Fault codes of the signal COMMIS STATUS (6.02): 49: Field not nominal during start. 50: Ohmic load not determined. 51: Current feedback is less than current reference during measurement of armature resistance. Current limits lower than the limit for continuous current flow or lower than 20%. 52: Inadmissible current curve. Fuse blown, thyristor not firing or no motor load. 53: Wrong starting conditions. The drive is running when the autotuning is started or run command is not given within 20 s after start of autotuning. 54: Too high speed during autotuning .Speed greater than 1% or EMF greater than 15%. 55: Inductance cannot be determined. Fuse blown, thyristor notfiring or no motor load. 56: Limit for continous current flow cannot be determined.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 3-9
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up 57: The field removal takes longer than 10 s. If the SDCS-FEX-1 is used, ensure, that the field current is zero. 58: Blocking or stop signal appears during autotuning.3.4.2 Field Current Controller The parameters of the field current controller for a single drive – or for Motor 1 in a Shared motion drive - can be defined by using the autotuning function. After nominal values of the motor and the converter are programmed, the autotuning feature can be executed. To start the autotuning follow the next steps: Command the drive to ON state (main contactor closed, NOT running) Set parameter DRIVEMODE (15.02) to 5 Tuning is completed, if the DRIVEMODE (15.02) changes back to zero. The converter can than be switched off. If the drive trips during the autotuning, the program sets DRIVEMODE (15.02) to -1 The reason for tripping can be read from the signal COMMIS STATUS (6.02). Fault codes of the signal COMMIS STATUS (6.02): 61: Illegal start conditions (drive not in ON state). 62: FEX autotuning not possible. 63: FEX autotuning not possible. Note: Tuning of the field current controller for Motor 2 (second field exciter) in a Shared motion drive must be done manually. See part 3.5.3-10 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up3.5 Manual Tuning In order to facilitate the tuning of the drive, DCS600 MultDrive has several manual tuning functions. With help of the manual tuning the following functions can be tuned: • Armature current controller • Field exciters • EMF controller • Speed loop When manual tuning is activated, the normal reference is switched off from the function and is replaced by test reference. The test reference can be either a square wave generator or an adjustable test-reference. Manual tuning can be activated only in LOCAL-mode. DRIVE MODE COMP-I "Man. tun. of arm. cur. controller" I1 I1>I2 (DRIVEMODE4) 4 I2 I1=I2 I1<I2 COMP-I TEST REF SELECT I1 "Man. tun. of first field exciter" I1>I2 (DRIVEMODE7) 7 I2 I1=I2 MUX-I4 A I1<I2 IA1 O SQRWAVE IA2 COMP-I "Man. tun. second field exciter" POT 1 SQUARE I1 I1>I2 Y1 O IA3 (DRIVEMODE8) 3.03 IA4 I2 I1=I2 POT 2 8 Y2 I1<I2 SQR WAVE PERIOD T t COMP-I I1 I1>I2 "Man. tun. of speed loop" TEST REFERENCE (DRIVEMODE9) I2 I1=I2 9 I1<I2 COMP-I I1 I1>I2 "Man. tun. of EMF controller" (DRIVEMODE11) I1=I2 11 I2 I1<I2 dcs_600docufig_35.ds4 used test reference Figure 3-1 Object and test reference selections in the manual tuning. The activation of the manual tuning parameter: DRIVE MODE (15.02) 4= armature current controller 7= first field exciter 8= second field exciter 9= speed loop (reference chain and speed controller) 11 = EMF controller3.5.1 Square Wave Generator The output of the square wave generator is adjusted by using 3 parameters: POT 1 (17.01) Higher value of the generator POT 2 (17.02) Lower value of the generator SQR WAVE PERIOD (17.03) Period time of square wave generator The output of the square wave generator can be read from the signal SQUARE WAVEDCC 600 Firmware Manual 3-11
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up3.5.2 Test Reference Selection The test reference is selected by the parameter TEST REF SEL (17.04) 0 0 Test signal is 0 1 POT1 use pot 1 2 POT2 use pot 2 3 SQR WAV use square wave 4 TST REF use test reference (Not used in DCC) Finally start the drive or only close main contactor in a case of field exciters. Measurements are recommended to do with Drives Window.3.5.3 Manual Tuning of the Speed Loop The test reference replaces the currently used speed reference. When using the square wave function, the drive can be set to accelerate and decelerate continuously without applying a new reference.3.5.4 Manual Tuning of Field Exciters The test reference replaces the field exciter references. When using the square wave function, the field reference can be stepped. Actual values FIELD CUR M1(2) 1.6 & 1.7 can be monitored by the Drives Window. By means of reference and actual value monitoring the gain values can easily be adjusted.3.5.5 Manual Tuning of Armature Current Controller During the test the field contactor is automatically opened to prevent the motor from running. The test reference replaces the ARMAT CURRENT REF, current limitation is not by-passed. Find continuous/discontinuous current limit The continuous current limit can be found by slowly increasing the current reference and at the same time monitoring the bit CONTINOUS_CURR (12) in CON2 BITS (6.05) with the Drives Window. The limit is reached when the bit- signal oscillates. After the limit is reached , the actual current is read and the value is set to the limit parameter: CONV CUR ACT (1.4) ⇒ DISCONT CUR LIMIT (43.06) Tuning of the armature current controller After setting the discontinuous current limit, the PI-controller can be tuned normally by using the square wave generator.3-12 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up3.5.6 Manual Tuning of the EMF-Controller Prior to the tuning of the EMF-controller the field controller has to be tuned. The tuning principle • The motor is started to run about half speed of the used field weakening area. • The signal EMF VOLT ACT (1.9) is read. The value is used to define the steps. The higher value of the step can be the value that are read. The lower value of the step can be 15% less. Settning the step: EMF VOLT ACT [V ] POT1 = 17.1 = ∗ 2804 42.06 [V ] POT2 = 17.2 = 17.1 * 0.85 Where EMF VOLT ACT [V] is the actual (read) emf voltage, and 42.06 is the nominal supply voltage. • The manual tuning function is activated (DRIVE MODE (15.02) = 11). The PI-controller can be tuned normally by using the square wave generator.3.6 Memory Handling3.6.1 Converter Type Change When the converter type or the converter control board SDCS-CON-2 have been changed / replaced, the warning “Type code changed“ is generated as long as the new converter type specific parameters haven’t been stored inside the SDCS-CON-2’s parameter FLASH memory (D35). This is done by setting the DRIVE MODE parameter (15.02) to 22. This action is completed, when the DRIVE MODE parameter has changed back to 0. The type code specific parameters stored into the SDCS-CON-2’s parameter FLASH memory are displayed in the signals: 4.04 CONV NOM VOLT nominal converter voltage 4.05 CONV NOM CURR nominal converter current 4.14 CONVERTER TYPE converter type 4.15 QUADRANT TYPE quadrant type 4.16 CONV OVCUR LEVEL current tripping level 4.17 MAX BRIDGE TEMP tripping level of heat sink temperature Note: If the jumper field S2 of SDCS-CON-2 has the pins 1-2 connected, the SDCS-CON-2 software uses always the default parameters. To get the type code parameters stored in the parameter FLASH-memory active, the pins 3-4 of the jumper field S2 must be connected.3.6.2 Software Update If the parameter structure of a new software version loaded to the SDCS-CON- 2 board is different from the one loaded previously (meaning: there are new or deleted parameters), the jumper field S2 must have the pins 1-2 connected (jumpers must be set before power-up), until the new default parameters haveDCC 600 Firmware Manual 3-13
    • Chapter 3 - Start-up been stored to the parameter FLASH-memory (by setting DRIVE MODE (15.02) to 22). Afterwards, the jumper must be set back to 3-4 (to get the parameters out of the parameter FLASH-memory active on next power-up). Note: Previously made parameter changes will be lost after this procedure. In case one doesn’t know, if the new software version has different parameter structure, it is strongly recommended to assume, it has different structure.3-14 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • 4 Chapter 4 - Co ntrol Operation4.1 Overview This chapter describes the Actual Signals, the Fault History and explains Keypad and External control.4.2 Actual Signals (Group 1) Actual Signals monitor DCC 600 functions. They do not affect the performance of the DCC 600. Actual Signal values are measured or calculated by the drive and they cannot be set by the user The Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel continuously displays three actual signals. When the ACT key is pressed, the full name of the three Actual Signals will be displayed. When the key is released, the short name (8 characters) and the value are displayed.  6 ZW  =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + Figure 4-1 Actual Signal Display Mode. Table 4-1 on the next page lists the Actual Signals: selected or monitored values, and functions. To select the actual values to be displayed follow the procedure described in Chapter 2 - Overview of DCC 600 Programming, Table 2-3, page 2-6.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 4-1
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation Table 4-1 Group 1, Actual Signals Actual Signals Range/Unit Description (Group 1) 1 MOTOR SPEED Rpm Selected motor speed value (filtered according to par. 23.5). 2 MOTOR SPEED FILT rpm Filtered motor speed value. 3 ARM VOLT ACT V Armature voltage of the motor 4 CONV CUR ACT A Actual armature current. + : Motoring - : Generating 5 MOTOR TORQUE % Filtered motor torque. FILT 6 FIELD CUR M1 A Filtered field current of motor 1. 7 FIELD CUR M2 A Filtered field current of motor 2. 8 MAINS VOLT ACT V Actual mains voltage. 9 EMF VOLT ACT V Actual motor EMF voltage. 10 HEAT SINK TEMP deg C Temperature of the cooling element. 11 MOTOR SELECTED MOTOR 1; Motor selected. MOTOR 2 12 SPEED REF Rpm Speed reference before ramp. 13 CTRL LOCATION LOCAL; I/O CTRL; Active control location. FIELDBUS; M/F CTRL 14 TIME OF USAGE Hours Elapsed time meter. 15 CONTROL MODE SPEED CONT; Used control mode. TORQUE CONT 17 DI8-2 STATUS Status of digital inputs. 18 AN IN 1 VALUE V Value of analogue input 1. 19 AN IN 2 VALUE V Value of analogue input 2. 20 AN IN 3 VALUE V Value of analogue input 3. 21 DO8-4 STATUS Status of digital outputs. 24 TOTAL INERTIA Kgm2 Calculated inertia from power optimisation autotune 25 EXT DI15-9 STATUS Status of IOE-1 digital inputs 26 AN IN TACHO V Value of analogue tacho input. VALUE 27 SQUARE WAVE Output signal square wave gen. 28 ARM L Rel inductance of the arm circuit. 29 ARM R Rel resistance of the arm circuit. 30 ARM CUR PI P- P-gain of PI curr. Controller GAIN4-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation Actual Signals Range/Unit Description (Group 1) 31 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI curr. Controller 32 DISCONT CUR %Ic Curr. Level between discontinuous LIMIT and continuous curr.4.3 Description of the Actual Signals (Group 1) 1 MOTOR SPEED Displays the speed of the motor, as measured by the DCC 600 per selection parameter 50.3 . The speed is displayed in rpm and filtered according to parameter 23.5 . 2 MOTOR SPEED FILT Displays a filtered value of the actual speed of the motor, as measured by the DCC 600 per selection parameter 50.3 . Filtered with 200 ms + parameter 23.5 filtering. The speed is displayed in rpm. 3 ARM VOLT ACT Actual armature voltage of the motor. Displayed in Volts. 4 CONV CUR ACT Actual converter armature current of the motor. Displayed in Amps.5 MOTOR TORQUE FILT Filtered motor torque in percent (%) of the motor’s nominal torque. Filter time constant: 42.12. Note: Motor nominal torque (Nm) = 9550 * Motor nominal power (kW) / Motor nominal speed (rpm) = 9550 * Umot * Imot / nmot / 1000 = 9550 * (par. 99.05) * (par. 99.06) / (par. 99.8 field weakening point) / 1000. 6 FIELD CUR M1 Filtered field current of motor 1. Filtered with 500 ms. Displayed in Amps. 7 FIELD CUR M2 Filtered field current of motor 2. Filtered with 500 ms. Displayed in Amps. 8 MAINS VOLT ACT Displays the mains voltage, as measured by the DCC 600. The voltage is displayed in Volts. 9 EMF VOLT ACT Actual motor EMF voltage. Displayed in Volts. 10 HEAT SINK TEMP Displays the temperature of the heatsink in degrees centigrade. 11 MOTOR SELECTED Indicates which motor is selected. 12 SPEED REF Displays the value of the total speed reference before ramp in %. 100 % corresponds to SPEED SCALING RPM, parameter 69.1 (if Motor 1), or to SPEED SCALE RPM 2, par. 80.24 (if Motor 2). 13 CTRL LOCATION Displays the active control location. Alternatives are: LOCAL, I/O CTRL, FIELDBUS and M/F CTRL. Refer to Keypad vs. External Control in this chapter. 14 TIME OF USAGE This Actual Signal is an elapsed-time indicator. 15 CONTROL MODE Used control mode: SPEED CONT: speed control TORQUE CONT: torque controlDCC 600 Firmware Manual 4-3
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation 17 DI8-2 STATUS Status of the six digital inputs. If the input is connected to voltage (48/115/230 V), the display will indicate 1. If the input is not connected, the display will be 0. 18 AN IN 1 VALUE Value of analogue input 1 displayed in volts. 19 AN IN 2 VALUE Value of analogue input 2 displayed in volts. 20 AN IN 3 VALUE Value of analogue input 3 displayed in volts. 21 DO8-4 STATUS Status of the digital outputs. “1” indicates that the output is energised and “0” indicates that the output is de-energised. 24 TOTAL INERTIA This actual signal gives the calculated inertia value from running the Power Optimisation Autotune and has to be set in parameter 68.4 INERTIA TOTAL UP and 68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN. 25 EXT DI15-9 STATUS Status of the seven digital inputs of optional board IOE-1. If the input is connected to voltage, the display will indicate 1. If the input is not connected, the display will be 0. Note: The most righthand digit represents digital input 9.26 AN IN TACHO VALUE Voltage measured at the analogue tacho input. Displayed in Volts. 27 SQUARE WAVE Output signal of the square wave generator. 28 ARM L Relative inductance of the motor armature circuit, as calculated by the autotuning function. 29 ARM R Relative resistance of the motor armature circuit, as calculated by the autotuning function. 30 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN P-gain of PI armature current controller, as calculated by the autotuning function. 31 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI armature current controller, as calculated by the autotuning function. 32 DISCONT CUR LIMIT Current level between discontinuous and continuous current, as calculated by the autotuning function.4-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation4.4 Int Actuals (Group 2) Table 4-2 Group 2, Internal Signals Signal name Range/Unit Description INT ACTUALS (Group 2) 1 SPEED REF 2 Rpm Ramp input reference limited by speed limits (parameters 20.1 & 20.2) 2 SPEED REF 3 Rpm Ramp output reference 3 SPEED REF 4 rpm Total speed reference = ramp output reference + speed correction reference 4 SPEED ERROR NEG rpm Actual speed - total speed reference 5 TORQUE PROP REF % TN Speed controller proportional part output 6 TORQUE INTEG REF % TN Speed controller integration part output 9 TORQUE REF 1 % TN Torque reference input to drive (torque ramp output) 10 TORQUE REF 2 % TN Speed controller total output + acceleration compensation reference. Limited with parameters 20.4 & 20.5 11 TORQUE REF 3 % Output of "Torque Selector", see parameter 72.2 14 TORQ USED REF % Final torque reference used by torque controller (Torque ref 5 with limits) 15 MOTOR TORQUE % Actual motor torque (unfiltered) 16 FIRING ANGLE Deg Thyristor firing angle (alpha). 17 MEASURED SPEED rpm Speed measured by pulse encoder. 18 POS ACT PPU +/- 32767 Position measurement value (scaled with parameter 70.1) 19 START True; False Start-order from I/O or Fieldbus 20 RUNNING True; False Drive running acknowledgment 21 BRAKE LIFT True; False Brake lift order 22 FAULT True; False Drive fault indication (tripped) 23 APPL DUTY % Application sw CPU load of AMC-DC 24 SPEED CORR rpm Speed correction reference 25 POWOP SPEEDREF % Power optimisation calculated reference.(% of 69.1) 26 REL FIELD CUR M1 % Unfiltered field current of motor 1 (in % of parameter 41.3) 27 REL FIELD CUR M2 % Unfiltered field current of motor 2 (in % of parameter 41.17)DCC 600 Firmware Manual 4-5
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation4.5 Fieldbus Words (Group 3) Table 4-3 Group 3, Fieldbus words Signal name Range/Unit Description FIELDBUS WORDS (Group 3) 1 FB STATUS WORD 0 – FFFF Packed Fieldbus Status Word, Dataset 2 Word 1, for bit boolean (Hex) details see section 5.6.12 2 FB FAULT WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packed Fieldbus Fault Word 1, Dataset 6 Word 1, for bit boolean (Hex) details see section 5.6.12 3 FB FAULT WORD 2 0 – FFFF Packed Fieldbus Fault Word 2, Dataset 6 Word 2, for bit boolean (Hex) details see section 5.6.12 4 FB FAULT WORD 3 0 – FFFF Packed Fieldbus Fault Word 3, Dataset 6 Word 3, for bit boolean (Hex) details see section 5.6.12 5 FB FAULT WORD 4 0-FFFF Packed Fieldbus Fault Word 4, Dataset 10 Word 3, for bit boolean (Hex) details see section 5.6.12 6 FB ALARM WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packed Fieldbus Alarm Word 1, Dataset 10 Word 1, for bit boolean (Hex) details see section 5.6.12 7 FB ALARM WORD 2 0 – FFFF Packed Fieldbus Alarm Word 2, Dataset 10 Word 2, for bit boolean (Hex) details see section 5.6.12 8 FB COMMAND 0 – FFFF Packed Fieldbus Command Word, Dataset 1 Word 1, for WORD boolean (Hex) bit details see section 5.6.12 9 FB SPEED REF % Fieldbus Speed reference, Dataset 1 Word 24.6 Information Signals (Group 4) Table 4-4 Group 4, Information signals Signal name Range/Unit Description INFORMATION (Group 4) 1 SW PACKAGE VER Name of the type of drive software package 2 DC VERSION Version of the loaded control sw (AMC-DC) 3 APPLIC NAME Name of the loaded FCB application sw 4 CONV NOM VOLT V Converter nominal voltage 5 CONV NOM CURR A Converter nominal current 6 FEX 1 CODE Field exciter 1 type coding 7 FEX 2 CODE Field exciter 2 type coding 8 FEX 1 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 1 9 FEX 2 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 2 10 BOOT SW Boot sw revision of SDCS-CON-2 VERSION 11 CONV SW Converter control sw revision of SDCS-CON-2 VERSION 12 APPLIC VERSION Date of the loaded FCB application sw 13 BASELIB Version of the application function block library VERSION 14 CONVERTER Recognized converter type TYPE 15 QUADRANT TYPE Recognized converter quadrant type 16 CONV OVCUR A Converter overcurrent tripping level LEVEL4-6 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation Signal name Range/Unit Description 17 MAX BRIDGE Cels Thyristor cooler temperature tripping level TEMP 18 FEX 1 COMM Timeout status of field exc. 1 comm. link STATUS 19 FEX 2 COMM Timeout status of field exc. 2 comm. link STATUS 20 FEX 1 COMM No. of comm. errors in field exc.1 Comm. link ERRORS 21 FEX 2 COMM No. of comm. errors in field exc. 2 comm. link ERRORS 23 CON SW Converter ocntrol sw pre-release of SDCS-CON-2 PRERELEASE 24 AMC SW Drive control sw pre-release of SDCS-AMC-DC PRERELEASE4.7 Drive Logic Sigs (Group 6) Table 4-5 Group 6, Drive Logic Signals Signal name Range/Unit Description DRIVE LOGIC SIGS (Group 6) 1 CURR CONTROL 0 – FFFF Packed Internal status of the current controller. STAT boolean (Hex) 2 COMMISS STATUS 0 … 32767 Commissioning status of the SDCS-CON-2 software (For details, see section 3.4.1). 5 CON2 BITS 0 – FFFF Packed This packed binary signal includes boolean signals boolean (Hex) from the SDCS-CON-2 board’s software. It is read from the SDCS-CON-2 board every 8 ms.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 4-7
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation4.8 Fault History The Fault History includes information on the 24 most recent faults and warnings that occurred in the DCC 600. The description of the fault and the total power-on time are available. The power-on time is calculated always when the DCC 600 is powered. Chapter 2 - Overview of DCC 600 Programming, Table 2-4, page 2-7, describes how to display and clear the Fault History from the Control Panel.4.9 Local Control vs. External Control The DCC 600 can be controlled (i.e. reference, ON/OFF and Start commands can be given) from an external control location or from Local control (Control Panel Keypad or a DrivesWindow PC tool). Figure 4-2 below shows the DCC 600 control locations. The selection between Keypad control and External control can be done with the LOC REM key on the Control Panel keypad. Keypad reference (rpm) Stand alone I/O Fieldbus communication ON/START, Speed ref (%) ON/START Speed ref (%) Figure 4-2 Control Locations If the device controlling the DCC 600 stops communicating, the operation defined by Parameter 30.12 MASTER FAULT FUNC, or 30.2 PANEL LOSS is executed.4.9.1 Keypad Control The control commands are given from the Control Panel keypad when DCC 600 is in Keypad Control. This is indicated by L (Local) on the Control Panel display. 6 ZW If operational commands and reference cannot be given from this Control Panel, it displays a blank character as shown below. ZW4-8 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 4 - Control Operation4.9.2 External Control When the DCC 600 is in External Control, the commands are given either from Fieldbus or I/O (Stand Alone mode). Selection is done with parameter 64.1 Stand Alone Sel. Stand alone If par. Stand Alone Sel (parameter 64.1) is set True (default value) the Stand Alone mode is selected. In external control the digital inputs DI 2, DI 6 - DI 8 and Ext DI 9 – DI15 as well as analog inputs AI1 & AI2 are connected to a CRANE function module. The CRANE function module is producing the references and commands like ON/OFF, START and so on. Fieldbus When the DCC 600 is in Fieldbus mode (64.1 Stand Alone Sel=False) the commands are given from the supervisory system and received over the field bus communication link.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 4-9
    • 5 Chapter 5 - Cra ne Program Description5.1 Overview This chapter describes the functionality of the Crane program with its two Application Macros: CRANE and M/F CTRL, and the two external control modes: Field bus mode and Stand Alone mode. The chapter also describes how to use the two User Macros. The chapter contains the following information: • Application Macro information • Operation, Fieldbus and Stand alone mode • External I/O Connections • Parameter Settings • Functional Block diagram of program • Function module descriptions The Parameter Settings tables in this chapter indicate parameters you may have to modify. These parameters are indicated in the tables with an arrow (-->) symbol. Refer to Appendix A – Complete Parameter Settings for the alternative settings for each parameter.5.2 Application Macros There are two application macros: CRANE and M/F CTRL. Selection is done with parameter 99.2 Application macro. Default setting is CRANE macro. CRANE macro includes all the crane software functions except the Master/Follower bus functionality. M/F CTRL macro includes all functions of the CRANE macro plus Master/Follower bus functionality (see description of function module "Master/Follower (72)"). NOTE: A change of application macro will reset all parameter settings to default, except for parameter group 99. Therefore macro selection should be done before making the application parameter settings.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-1
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.3 Stand alone mode operation All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the Control Panel keypad or selectively from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the LOC REM key on the Control Panel keypad. The drive is speed controlled. In External Control the control location is the basic I/O. The reference signal is connected to analogue input AI1 and On/Start and Direction signals are generated from digital inputs DI2 ... DI8. One DI is used for connecting slowdown limit switches in series, and one DI for Fast Stop order from mechanical overload and slack rope indications. The mechanical brake is controlled from e.g. DO4 and the acknowledgement is connected to e.g. DI6. Two analogue and Five digital output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel are SPEED, TORQUE and CURRENT. The feedback data through Fieldbus communication: drive -> PLC is available also in stand alone mode (by enabling Comm module; parameter 98.2).EMBEDOperation Diagram  6 Z  =://. ! ZW Input Power >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + Ext. Controls Reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from the ~ rpm Speed Control Panel. To change to External ctrl, press LOC REM key at Nm Torque standstill. Relay  ZW  Outputs =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + Brake Motor M Speed reference is read from analogue input AI1 (Terminal Block X21). On/Start and Direction commands are generated from digital inputs DI7 and DI8. Figure 5-1 Operation Diagram for Stand Alone Mode.5.3.1 Input and Output I/O Signals Input and Output I/O Signals as default assigned by the Crane program. (For more details see Crane module (64) description page 5-18): Input Signals Output Signals Brake Ackn: (DI6) Analogue Output AO1: Not selected Zero Pos: (DI2) Analogue Output AO2: Not selected Start Dir A: (DI7) Relay Output DO4: Brake lift Start Dir B: (DI8) Relay Output DO5: Watch dog-N Slow Down-N: (DI9) Fast Stop-N: (DI10) Speed Ref: (AI1) Torque Ref: (AI2) Speed Corr: (AI3)5-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.3.2 External Connections The following connection example is applicable when the Crane program with Stand Alone control mode and Joystick control is used. Terminal IOB-21 & Function CON-2 X6:1 DI 1 Converter Fan ackn. (fixed) X6:2 DI 2 Zero Pos X6:3 DI 3 Main Contactor Ackn. (fixed) X6:4 DI 4 Electrical disconnect (fixed) X6:5 DI 5 Not used X6:6 DI 6 Brake Acknowledge (def.) X6:7 DI 7 Start Dir A X6:8 DI 8 Start Dir B X7:3,4 +48V IOB-21: 48Vdc, max 50 mA X6:9 +48V CON-2: 48Vdc, max 50 mA Terminal IOB-1 24V Function X1:1 DI 9 Slow down limits X1:2 DI 10 FAST STOP-N X1:3 DI 11 STEP REF 2 X1:4 DI 12 STEP REF 3 X1:5 OV for DI9-12 X1:6 DI 13 STEP REF 4 X1:7 DI 14 X1:8 DI 15 X1:9 OV for DI13-15 Figure 5-2 External DI connections to DCC 600 in Stand Alone mode, Joystick control.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-3
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Terminal Terminal IOB-3 CON-2 Function X4:7 X4:4 Vref. Reference voltage 10 VDC Forward max 5 mA X4:8 X4:3 GND X3:4 X3:6 AI 1+ Speed reference Reverse 0…10V <-> 0 …100% X3:3 X3:5 AI 1- TE X3:6 X3:8 AI 2+ Torque reference 0…10V <-> 0 …Tmax X3:5 X3:7 AI 2- X3:8 X3:10 AI3+ Speed Correction +/-10V <-> +/- 100% X3:7 X3:9 AI3- rpm X4:1 X4:7 AO1+ Speed -10V … +10V <-> -100 …100% X4:2 X4:6 AO1- Nm X4:3 X4:8 AO2+ Torque -10V …+10V <-> -Tn…+Tn X4:4 X4:6 AO2- TE Terminal +24V Com. IOB-21 Function Fan X4:1 DO 1 Converter Fan order (fixed) Contactor X4:2 Field exc. X4:3 DO 2 Field exciter order (fixed) Contactor X4:4 Brake X4:5 DO 3 Main Contactor order X4:6 (fixed) Contactor X4:6 E-Stop X4:7 DO 4 Brake lift (def.) Contactor X4:8 X5:1 DO 5 Watchdog_N (def.) X5:2 X5:3 DO 6 ”Programmable” X5:4 X5:5 DO 7 ”Programmable” X5:6 X5:7 DO 8 ”Programmable” X5:8 Figure 5-3 External AI, AO and DO connections to DCC600 in Stand Alone mode, Joystick control.5-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.3.3 Control Signals Connection Stand Alone mode STAND ALONE SPEED DI 2, DI 6-8 CONTROLER CRANE Ext DI 9-15 SPEED EXTERNAL MINIMUM SPEED 20.1 MAX MAXIMUM SPEED 20.2 MODULE SELECTOR SPEED Power AI.1 Optimization REF SPEED CTRL Group 23 KEYPAD TORQUE CONTROLLER TORQUE TORQUE MAXIMUM AI.2 TORQUE SPEED CORR AI 3 CO TORQUE CTRL Group 24 CDP 312 PANEL REF REF. WITH SIGN. LOC REM KEYPAD ON/START EXTERNAL 1 0 Figure 5-4 Control Signals Connection Stand Alone modeDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-5
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.3.4 Parameter Settings for the Stand alone mode → Typical parameter values to check during start-up. If required, alter the values to meet the needs of your application. A complete parameter list is provided in Appendix A. Table 5-1 Listing of parameters typically requiring changes during startup. Stand alone mode. 99 START-UP DATA 28 MOTOR PROTECTION 99.2 APPLICATION MACRO CRANE 28.1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC →240 s 99.3 APPLIC RESTORE NO 28.2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR →100 %Im 99.5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE →350.0 V 28.3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 120 % 99.6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT →0.0 A 28.4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 130 % 99.8 MOTOR NOM SPEED →1500.0 rpm 28.5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 240 s 99.9 DEVICE NAME “Device name” 28.6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 100 %Im 28.7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 120 % 10 DIGITAL INPUTS 28.8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 130 % 10.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL DI6 28.9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED 10.2 ZERO POS SEL →NOT USED 28.10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx 10.3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL →NOT USED 28.11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx 10.4 FAST STOP-N SEL →NOT USED 28.12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED 10.6 SYNC SEL NOT USED 28.13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx 10.8 STEP REF2 SEL NOT USED 28.14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx 10.9 STEP REF3 SEL NOT USED 28.18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED 10.10 STEP REF4 SEL NOT USED 28.19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL →NOT USED 10.11 HIGH SPEED SEL NOT USED 28.20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM 4A 10.12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL NOT USED 28.21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL 10 ms 10.13 ACCELERATE SEL NOT USED 28.22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV 150.0 %Us 28.23 SPD MEAS MON LEV 15.0 rpm 15 DRIVE LOGIC PAR 28.24 SPD EMF MON LEV 50.0 V 15.2 DRIVE MODE 0 28.25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED 15.3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE 15.4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT 41 MOTOR NOM VAL 15.5 USED FEX TYPE →0 41.3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR →0.3 A 15.6 FIELD CONTRL MODE →FIX 41.10 CUR REF SLOPE 10 %/ms 15.7 EXT FAN ACK MODE NO SUPERVIS 41.11 ARM L →0.0 15.10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED 41.12 ARM R →0.0 15.11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.14 FLD CUR@ 40% FLUX 40.0%If1 15.12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.15 FLD CUR@ 70% FLUX 70.0%If1 15.17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 200 ms 41.16 FLD CUR@ 90% FLUX 90.0%If1 15.18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED 41.17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A 15.19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 100 ms 41.19 INT EMF REF →105.0 %Us 42 MEASUREMENT 20 LIMITS 42.1 MAINS PHASE ORDER R–S–T 20.1 MINIMUM SPEED →-1500 rpm 42.5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 230 % 20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED →1500 rpm 42.6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT → (Rated) or (42.08) 20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE →100.0 %TN 42.7 S CONV NOM CURR 0A 20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE →-100.0%TN 42.8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0V 20.12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDG →100.0 %Im 42.9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP 0 Cels 20.13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDG →-100.0 %Im 42.10 S CONVERTER TYPE NONE 20.14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 150 deg 42.11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE 20.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 15 deg 42.12 TORQ ACT FTC 200 ms 20.16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If1 20.17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If2 43 CURRENT CONTROL 43.2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN →300.0 23 SPEED CTRL 43.3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN →3200.0 23.1 KPS →10.0 43.6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT →50.0%Ic 23.2 TIS →300 ms 43.10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT 23.3 DERIVATION TIME 0 ms 43.11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0.7 %Ic 23.4 ACC COMP DER TIME 0s 43.12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 25.0 %Ic 23.5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 ms 43.15 REV GAP 0 23.6 SPEED STEP (only for DW) 0 rpm 44 FIELD EXCITATION 44.1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0.0 44.2 P-GAIN FEX 1 →1.0 44.3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 →200.0 ms 44.7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0.0 44.8 P-GAIN FEX 2 1.0 44.9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 200.0 ms 44.13 FIELD 1 REF RED 30.0 %If1 44.17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If1 44.21 FIELD 2 REF RED 30.0 %If2 44.22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If25-6 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description 46 EMF CONTROL 70 POS MEASURE 46.1 POS LIM EMF CON 10.0 %Fn 70.1 POS SCALE 100.00 PPU 46.2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100.0 %Fn 70.2 SYNC COND Pos 46.3 EMF CON KP →150 46.4 EMF CON KI →5000 71 FIELDBUS COMM 46.5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV 2% 71.1 COMTEST FLT TD 300 ms 46.6 EMF ACT FILT TC 10 ms 71.4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE 46.9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 10 ms 46.11 V STEP 0% 72 MASTER / FOLLOWER 72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE OFF 50 SPEED MEASURING 72.2 TORQUE SELECTOR ZERO 50.2 SPEED MEAS MODE A _-_ B _-_ 72.3 LOAD SHARE 100.0 % 50.3 SPEED FB SEL →CALC BY EMF 72.4 WINDOW SEL ON OFF 50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR →1024 72.5 WINDOW WIDTH POS 0.0 rpm 50.6 SPACT FILT TIME 0ms 72.6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG 0.0 rpm 72.7 DROOP RATE 0.00 % 62 TORQUE MONITOR 72.8 TORQ REF A FTC 0 ms 62.1 TORQ MON SEL True 72.9 M/F FAULT TD 200 ms 62.2 SP DEV LEV 10 % 72.10 M/F COMM ERR TD 200 ms 62.3 TORQ FLT TD 600 ms 72.11 MF BROADCAST MODE NO 62.4 SP DER BLK LEV *) →8 %/s 80 SHARED MOTION 63 FAST STOP 80.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL2 DI8 63.1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 NOT USED 80.2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED 63.2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 →NOT USED 80.3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 BRAKE LIFT 80.4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 -100.0%TN 64 CRANE 80.5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 -100.0%TN 64.1 STAND ALONE SEL True 80.6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 100.0%Im 64.2 CONTIN GEAR False 80.7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 -100.0%Im 64.3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 98.0 % 80.8 KPS 2 10.0 64.4 DEADZONE A →0 % 80.9 TIS 2 300 ms 64.5 DEADZONE B →0 % 80.10 ARM L 2 0.0 64.6 REF SHAPE 20 80.11 ARM R 2 0.0 64.7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF →25 % 80.12 INT EMF REF 2 105.0%Us 64.8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.3 s 80.13 ARM CUR PI PGAIN2 300.0 64.9 TORQUE REF SCALE 1.00 80.14 ARM CUR PI IGAIN2 3200.0 64.10 CONTROL TYPE →JOYSTICK 80.15 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 50.0%Ic 64.11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 % 80.16 SPEED FR SEL 2 CALC BY EMF 64.12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 400 ms 80.17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 1.0% 64.13 STEP REF LEVEL 1 10.0 % 80.18 SP DEV LEV 2 10% 64.14 STEP REF LEVEL 2 25.0 % 80.19 TORQ FLT TD 2 600ms 64.15 STEP REF LEVEL 3 50.0 % 80.20 SP DER BLK LEV 2 8%/s 64.16 STEP REF LEVEL 4 100.0 % 80.21 TORQ PROV SEL 2 False 80.22 POWOP SELECT 2 False 66 TORQUE PROVING 80.23 BASE SPEED 2 100.0% 66.1 TORQ PROV SEL →False 80.24 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 1500rpm 66.2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.5 s 80.25 ACC TIME FORW 2 5.0 s 66.3 TORQ PROV REF 20.0 % 80.26 ACC TIME REV 2 5.0 s 66.4 REGEN TEST SEL True 80.27 DEC TIME FORW 2 5.0 s 80.28 DEC TIME REV 2 5.0 s 68 POWER OPTIMIZE 80.29 SPEED REF TD 2 0.05 s 68.1 POWOP SELECT →False 80.30 START TORQ SEL 2 NOT USED 68.2 BASE SPEED →100.0 % 80.31 POS SCALE 2 100.00PPU 68.3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL False 80.32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 350.0 V 68.4 INERTIA TOTAL UP 3.00 kgm2 80.33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 0.0A 68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN →3.00 kgm2 80.34 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2 1500.0 rpm 68.6 TQLIM UP →100.0 % 80.35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD 0.3s 68.7 TQLIM DWN →75.0 % 68.8 POWOP RESET LEV 12 % 92 DATASET TR ADDR 92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 202 69 REFERENCE HANDLER 92.2 DATASET 4 WORD 2 218 69.1 SPEED SCALING RPM →1500 rpm 92.3 DATASET 4 WORD 3 104 69.2 ACC TIME FORW →5.0 s 69.3 ACC TIME REV →5.0 s 98 OPTION MODULES 69.4 DEC TIME FORW →5.0 s 98.2 COMM MODULE NO 69.5 DEC TIME REV →5.0 s 98.3 CH3 NODE ADDR 1 69.6 S-RAMP TC 0.0 s 98.4 CH0 NODE ADDR 1 69.7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 2 .0 98.8 IO BOARD CONFIG →IOB2+3 69.8 SPEED REF TD →0.05 s 69.9 START TORQ SEL →NOT USED 69.10 RAMP RATE=1 True 100 *) Calculate as : % / s, where RT = longest ramp time in sec onds RT × 1.5DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-7
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.4 Fieldbus mode operation All drive commands and reference settings can be given from the Control Panel keypad or selectively from an external control location. The active control location is selected with the LOC REM key on the Control Panel keypad. The drive is normally speed controlled. In External Control the control location is from the Fieldbus communication. The reference signal, On/Start a.s.o. are connected to corresponding datasets, see Fieldbus Receive description for details. The mechanical brake is controlled from DO4 and the acknowledgement is connected to DI6 as a default. Example of digital input connections: DI7 Sync, is position measurement synchronisation. DI4 is electrical disconnect. Two analogue and five digital output signals are available on terminal blocks. Default signals for the Actual Signal Display Mode of the Control Panel are SPEED, TORQUE and CURRENT.Operation Diagram Input  6 ZW  Power =://. ! ZW Fieldbus comm. module >9<;?/   -?<</8>  + ~ rpm Speed Reference and Start/Stop and Direction commands are given from Nm Torque the Control Panel. To change to External ctrl, press LOC REM key Relay at standstill. Outputs  ZW  =://. ! ZW >9<;?/   Brake -?<</8>  + Motor M Start/Stop commands and References are received through the Fieldbus communication. Figure 5-5 Operation Diagram for Fieldbus Mode.5.4.1 Input and Output I/O Signals Example of Input and Output I/O Signals selected in Fieldbus mode, i.e. supervisory controller (PLC) is used: Input Signals Output Signals Brake Ackn: (DI6) Analogue Output AO1: Not selected El disc.: (DI4) Analogue Output AO2: Not selected Sync: (DI7) Relay Output DO4: Brake lift Relay Output DO5: Watchdog-N5-8 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.4.2 External Connections The following connection example is applicable when the Crane program is used in Fieldbus mode. Terminal IOB-21 & Function CON-2 X6:1 DI 1 Converter Fan ackn. (fixed) X6:2 DI 2 X6:3 DI 3 Main Contactor Ackn. (fixed) X6:4 DI 4 Electrical disconnect (fixed) X6:5 DI 5 Not used (Emerg. Stop) X6:6 DI 6 Brake Acknowledge (def.) X6:7 DI 7 Sync. X6:8 DI 8 X7:3,4 +48V IOB-21: 48Vdc, max 50 mA X6:9 +48V CON-2: 48Vdc, max 50 mA Terminal +24V Com. IOB-21 Function Fan X4:1 DO 1 Converter Fan order (fixed) Contactor X4:2 Field exc. X4:3 DO 2 Field exciter order (fixed) Contactor X4:4 Brake X4:5 DO 3 Main Contactor order X4:6 (fixed) Contactor X4:6 E-Stop X4:7 DO 4 Brake lift (def.) Contactor X4:8 X5:1 DO 5 Watchdog_N (def.) X5:2 X5:3 DO 6 ”Programmable” X5:4 X5:5 DO 7 ”Programmable” X5:6 X5:7 DO 8 ”Programmable” X5:8 Figure 5-6 External connections in Fieldbus modeDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-9
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.4.3 Control Signals Connection in Field Bus Mode FIELD BUS DataSet1, Word1 Bit 2 and 4 SPEED CONTROLLER EXTERNAL MINIMUM SPEED 20.1 MAX MAXIMUM SPEED 20.2 SELECTOR DataSet1, SPEED REF. Word2 Power Optimization SPEED CTRL Group 23 SELECT KEYPAD TORQ. CTRL DS1.1 Bit 7 TORQUE TORQUE CONTROLLER DataSet1, REF. Word3 MAXIMUM TORQUE 20.4 TORQUE CTRL SPEED CORR. Group 24 DS3,2 CDP312 PANEL REF REF. WITH SIGN. LOC REM KEYPAD ON/START EXTERNAL 1 0 Figure 5-7 Control Signals Connection in Fieldbus mode5-10 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.4.4 Speed correction in Fieldbus mode In Fieldbus mode there is a possibility to send a speed correction reference ("non-ramped" reference added to ramp unit output), to the drive: In the Fieldbus communication interface: DataSet 3, Word 2 is connected as a Speed Correction input signal (10 ms updating time). The speed correction reference is limited so that the sum of the normal "ramped" speed reference and the speed correction reference cannot exceed Maximum/Minimum Speed setting (parameters 20.1 & 20.2).DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-11
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.4.5 Parameter Settings for the Fieldbus mode → Typical parameter values to check during start-up. If required, alter the values to meet the needs of your application. A complete parameter list is provided in Appendix A. Table 5-2 Parameter Settings for the Fieldbus mode 99 START-UP DATA 28 MOTOR PROTECTION 99.2 APPLICATION MACRO CRANE 28.1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC →240 s 99.3 APPLIC RESTORE NO 28.2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR →100 %Im 99.5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE →350.0 V 28.3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 120 % 99.6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT →0.0 A 28.4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 130 % 99.8 MOTOR NOM SPEED →1500.0 rpm 28.5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 240 s 99.9 DEVICE NAME “Device name” 28.6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 100 %Im 28.7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 120 % 10 DIGITAL INPUTS 28.8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 130 % 10.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL DI6 28.9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED 10.2 ZERO POS SEL NOT USED 28.10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx 10.3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL NOT USED 28.11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP 0xxx 10.4 FAST STOP-N SEL NOT USED 28.12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED 10.6 SYNC SEL →NOT USED 28.13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx 10.8 STEP REF2 SEL NOT USED 28.14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP 0xxx 10.9 STEP REF3 SEL NOT USED 28.18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED 10.10 STEP REF4 SEL NOT USED 28.19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL →NOT USED 10.11 HIGH SPEED SEL NOT USED 28.20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM 4A 10.12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL →NOT USED 28.21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL 10 ms 10.13 ACCELERATE SEL NOT USED 28.22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV 150.0 %Us 28.23 SPD MEAS MON LEV 15.0 rpm 15 DRIVE LOGIC PAR 28.24 SPD EMF MON LEV 50.0 V 15.2 DRIVE MODE 0 28.25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED 15.3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE 15.4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT 41 MOTOR NOM VAL 15.5 USED FEX TYPE →0 41.3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR →0.3 A 15.6 FIELD CONTRL MODE →FIX 41.10 CUR REF SLOPE 10 %/ms 15.7 EXT FAN ACK MODE NO SUPERVIS 41.11 ARM L →0.0 15.10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED 41.12 ARM R →0.0 15.11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.14 FLD CUR@ 40% FLUX 40.0%If1 15.12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL DISABLE 41.15 FLD CUR@ 70% FLUX 70.0%If1 15.17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 200 ms 41.16 FLD CUR@ 90% FLUX 90.0%If1 15.18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED 41.17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A 15.19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 100 ms 41.19 INT EMF REF →105.0 %Us 20 LIMITS 42 MEASUREMENT 20.1 MINIMUM SPEED →-1500 rpm 42.1 MAINS PHASE ORDER R–S–T 20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED →1500 rpm 42.5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 230 % 20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE →100.0 %TN 42.6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT → (Rated) or (42.08) 20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE →-100.0%TN 42.7 S CONV NOM CURR 0A 20.12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDG →100.0 %Im 42.8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0V 20.13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDG →-100.0 %Im 42.9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP 0 Cels 20.14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 150 deg 42.10 S CONVERTER TYPE NONE 20.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 15 deg 42.11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE 20.16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If1 42.12 TORQ ACT FTC 200 ms 20.17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV 115.0 %If2 43 CURRENT CONTROL 23 SPEED CTRL 43.2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN →300.0 23.1 KPS →10.0 43.3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN →3200.0 23.2 TIS →300 ms 43.6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT →50.0%Ic 23.3 DERIVATION TIME 0 ms 43.10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT 23.4 ACC COMP DER TIME 0s 43.11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0.7 %Ic 23.5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 ms 43.12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 25.0 %Ic 23.6 SPEED STEP (only for DW) 0 rpm 43.15 REV GAP 0 44 FIELD EXCITATION 44.1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0.0 44.2 P-GAIN FEX 1 →1.0 44.3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 →200.0 ms 44.7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0.0 44.8 P-GAIN FEX 2 1.0 44.9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 200.0 ms 44.13 FIELD 1 REF RED 30.0 %If1 44.17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If1 44.21 FIELD 2 REF RED 30.0 %If2 44.22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 50.0 %If25-12 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description 46 EMF CONTROL 66 TORQUE PROVING 46.1 POS LIM EMF CON 10.0 %Fn 66.1 TORQ PROV SEL →False 46.2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100.0 %Fn 66.2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.5 s 46.3 EMF CON KP →150 66.3 TORQ PROV REF 20.0 % 46.4 EMF CON KI →5000 66.4 REGEN TEST SEL True 46.5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV 2% 68 POWER OPTIMIZE 46.6 EMF ACT FILT TC 10 ms 68.1 POWOP SELECT →False 46.9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 10 ms 68.2 BASE SPEED →100.0 % 46.11 V STEP 0% 68.3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL False 68.4 INERTIA TOTAL UP →3.00 kgm2 50 SPEED MEASURING 68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN →3.00 kgm2 50.2 SPEED MEAS MODE A _-_ B _-_ 68.6 TQLIM UP →100.0 % 50.3 SPEED FB SEL →CALC BY EMF 68.7 TQLIM DWN →75.0 % 50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR →1024 68.8 POWOP RESET LEV 12 % 50.6 SPACT FILT TIME 0ms 69 REFERENCE HANDLER 51 MASTER ADAPTER 69.1 SPEED SCALING RPM →1500 rpm 51.1 MODULE TYPE (module type) 69.2 ACC TIME FORW →5.0 s 51.2 … 51.15 69.3 ACC TIME REV →5.0 s 69.4 DEC TIME FORW →5.0 s 62 TORQUE MONITOR 69.5 DEC TIME REV →5.0 s 62.1 TORQ MON SEL True 69.6 S-RAMP TC 0.0 s 62.2 SP DEV LEV 10 % 69.7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 2 .0 62.3 TORQ FLT TD 600 ms 69.8 SPEED REF TD →0.05 s 62.4 SP DER BLK LEV *) →8 %/s 69.9 START TORQ SEL →NOT USED 69.10 RAMP RATE=1 →True 63 FAST STOP 63.1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 →NOT USED 70 POS MEASURE 63.2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 NOT USED 70.1 POS SCALE →100.00 PPU 70.2 SYNC COND Pos 64 CRANE 64.1 STAND ALONE SEL !False 71 FIELDBUS COMM 64.2 CONTIN GEAR False 71.1 COMTEST FLT TD 300 ms 64.3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 98.0 % 71.4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE 64.4 DEADZONE A 0% 98 OPTION MODULES 64.5 DEADZONE B 0% 98.2 COMM MODULE →NO 64.6 REF SHAPE 20 98.3 CH3 NODE ADDR 1 64.7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF 25 % 98.4 CH0 NODE ADDR →1 64.8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.3 s 98.8 IO BOARD CONFIG IOB2+3 64.9 TORQUE REF SCALE 1.00 64.10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK 64.11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 % 64.12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 400 ms 64.13 STEP REF LEVEL 1 10.0 % 64.14 STEP REF LEVEL 2 25.0 % 64.15 STEP REF LEVEL 3 50.0 % 64.16 STEP REF LEVEL 4 100.0 % ! Parameter value different from default setting. 100 *) Calculate as : % / s, where RT = longest ramp time in sec onds RT × 1.5DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-13
    • DCC 600 Firmware Manual 1 2 3 4 5 FIELD BUS MODE DRIVE ON DRIVE ON ON 4B RUNNING TORQ PROV OK POS ACT PPU TORQUE 4D MECH. FIELD- START OVR START LOGIC 4C MOT TORQ TORQ PROV REF 3C 1B EMERG STOP SYNC RDY FIELD- A PROVING DRIVE SPEED REF FAST ZERO SET TORQ PROV FLT 5D 1B BRAKE ACKN BRAKE READY BUS HAND- BRAKE LONG FTIME BUS HIGH SPEED OK 1B EMERG STOP 1A RESET OVR RDY FOR RUN CONTR. BRAKE LIFT COMM. LING (66) LOAD MEAS SEL,... 2C 5D FAULT 5D ZERO SPEED RUNNING COMM. POS PRECOUNT,... 3D LOCAL START 2 BRAKE FLT 5D FOLLOW RESET OVR 4A,5D LOCAL START LIMITING 2D RUN (67) MAS OSC FLT 5D LOCAL STOP SPEED REF 3 (65) (71) TORQ REF 4B RDY FOR RUN SPEED ACT (71) SPEED CORR 2A,5D FAULT FAST STOP 1, 11 3C AO2 FAST STOP 1 FAST FAST ZERO SET Transmit Receive FAST STOP 11 SPEED OFF STOP 2D FAST STOP 12 FAST STOP DRIVE SPEED REF (63) DRIVE SPEED REF START OVR B START Figure 5-8 Function Block Diagram DI6 BRAKE ACKN 3A HIGH SPEED OK Digital DI4 POWER ON ACKN / EMERG STOP-N 3A HIGH SPEED OK inputs DI7 SYNC 3D TORQ REF (10) TORQ REF REF ZERO SET ON READY BASIC 4B SPEED CORR DRIVE SPEED REF RUN MOTOR RDY FOR RUN Digital REF BRAKE LIFT SPEED CORR START 2 RUNNING Out (Def.on DO4) HAND- Par 64.1 Stand alone select 1A RAMP RATE SPEED REF CONTROL FOLLOW (14) STAND ALONE MODE LOAD MEAS SEL LING LIMITING FORCE SPC 1D SPEED REF LOCAL SPEED REF 3, 4 Analog AI1 SPEED REF SPC FORCE REF CRANE LOCAL SPEED ACT inputs AI2 TORQ REF SPEED REF POWOP TORQ REF MOT TORQ STAND AI3 SPEED CORR 3A TORQ PROV REF 2B SPEED CORR ALONE SPEED REF 3 C (69) MOT TORQ LOGIC AO1 DI6 BRAKE ACKN AND 5.5 Function Block Diagram Analog AO2Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description DI2 ZERO POS REF. Digital Out DI7 START DIR A SPEED ACT (15) POWER inputs DI8 START DIR B MOT TORQ Ext DI9 SLOWDOWN-N OPTIMI- SPEED ACT HIGH SPEED OK SPEED Ext DI10 FAST STOP-N ZATION (10) Monitor ZERO SPEED 2D,4A Ext DI11 (68) (64) FAST STOP 12 3B Ext DI12 Ext DI13 (61) Ext DI14 Ext DI15 (10) MOT OVER SPEED FAULT FAULT TORQUE TORQ FLT CONTROL LOCATION LOCAL POS PRECOUNT PPU SPEED REF 4 D PANEL LOCAL POSITION 4A BRAKE FLT Handling START PANEL LOCAL START 2A RESET SYNC RDY POS ACT PPU Monitor Operation 1A MEA- 5A 3A TORQ PROV FLT STOP PANEL LOCAL STOP HW SYNC INHIBIT SURING SYNC RDY (62) 1A MAS OSC FLT SPEED REF LOCAL 3C 5D ZERO SPEED PGM SYNC 1B CHOPPER FLT PANEL RESET 5D 1B SYNC (60) (70) 1A RESET OVR 1D PANEL RESET Figure 5-2 Functional block diagram 5-14
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6 Function Module Description5.6.1 Local operation ( 60 ) This function module contains the necessary logic for Local mode operation from the Control Panel. Normally used only for commissioning and maintenance. The unit gives commands: Start/stop, Speed ref local, Local/remote and Reset from the panel. All crane drive functions (such as mechanical brake control) are active also in Local control mode (except power optimisation). Please note that inputs for Slowdown limits, Stop limits and Fast stop are NOT active when running in Local control mode. Speed correction references are not active when running in Local mode. Parameter (60.1) LOC OPER INH = ” true ” will force the drive to external control mode (LOCAL = ” 0 ”). The drive is then only controlled from the Field Bus communication or in Stand alone mode from I/O signals. To be able to change the mode from External control to Local control or reverse the motor has to be stopped with brakes set, that is: ZERO SPEED = ”1" and RUNNING = "0". Local running is performed from the Control Panel, which contains push- buttons for ON, OFF, START and STOP of the converter, for controlling the speed of the motor up and down, and for Fast or Slow reference change. Ramp times (par. 69.2 - 5) are in Local multiplied with a scaling factor: RAMP SCALE LOCAL (parameter 69.7, default = 2.0). The direction of the drive is changed by giving positive or negative reference (REF). Pressing ON (1), push-button will give ON-order, = contactors on. Pressing Start push-button drive will lift brakes and ramp up per given speed reference. If pressing Start on panel but no reference higher than ZERO SPEED LEV (61.1) given within the time LOC ZERO SPEED TD (60.3), than the drive will stop again. Pressing Stop push-button while running will ramp motor to zero speed, and set brake. When pressing Off push-button (0) converter will be switched off = contactors off.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-15
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.2 Speed monitor ( 61 ) The function module is used to supervise the speed of the motor. The supervision consists of the following tasks: - To detect motor zero speed rotation - To give tripping signal at motor overspeed Detection of motors zero speed rotation. While running the motor the output signal ZERO SPEED is ” 0 ”. When the speed is below the level ZERO SPEED LEV (61.1) and the time ZERO SPEED TIME ( 61.2) has elapsed the signal ZERO SPEED becomes ” 1”, indicating zero speed on the motor and the mechanical brake will be set. Trips at overspeed. If the motor speed exceeds the level determined by MOT OVERSPEED LEV (61.3) then the drive is tripped instantly (converter Off + brakes set) via the signal MOT OVER SPEED, indicating fault on panel, to Fieldbus and faultlogger.5.6.3 Torque monitor (62) The function module is used to supervise the torque of the motor by checking that the motor is following the speed reference in terms of direction of change during accel-/deceleration and without excessive speed error during accel-/deceleration and normal running. For the supervision to be active TORQ MON SEL (62.1) has to be set ”True”. If the absolute value of the speed error (SPEED REF4 - SPEED ACT) is higher than SP DEV LEV (Parameter 62.2) for a time longer than TORQ FLT TD (Parameter 62.3), the drive trips for torque fault; TORQ FLT, indicating fault to panel, Fieldbus and faultlogger. Parameter SP DER BLK LEV (62.4), rate of actual speed change in % per second, can be set so that it blocks the protection during acceleration and deceleration. As long as the actual rate of change (derivative) of the motor speed during acceleration or deceleration is higher than the setting of parameter SP DER BLK LEV, the torque fault protection is blocked. Example: Acceleration ramp times set to e.g. 5 seconds. With SP DER BLK LEV set to 8 %/s, the drive will not trip for torque fault if reaching torque limit during acceleration, as long as the actual acceleration time (0-100%) is below 12.5 seconds (100% / 8%/s = 12.5 s).5-16 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.4 Fast stop ( 63 ) The module contains logic for fast stopping the drive. Three different types of fast stop can be obtained with this module. They are: - With torque limit only = fast stop 1 - With torque limit and mechanical braking = fast stop 2 - With mechanical braking only = fast stop 3 Note that fast stop is not to be mixed up with emergency stop. NOTE: Fast stop functions are not active when in Local control! The module has three output signals to achieve the different fast stops. FAST ZERO SET is set to ” 1 ” when fast stop 1 is ordered, i. e. fast stop with torque limit only (brake is applied at zero speed). All three signals FAST ZERO SET, SPEED OFF and FAST STOP are set to ” 1 ” when fast stop 2 is ordered, i. e. stop with both current limit and mechanical breaking. FAST STOP is set to "1" when fast stop 3 is ordered, i.e. fast stop with mechanical braking only. To run the drive again after reaching zero speed, the START-signal must be reset before accepting a new start-order. There are two input signals from the Fieldbus communication module, FAST STOP 1 and FAST STOP 11 to order fast stop: -FAST STOP 1 = ” 1 ” gives fast stop 1 -FAST STOP 11 = ” 1 ” gives a fast stop per selection parameter 63.1= FAST STOP TYPE 11 To use FAST STOP 11 for: Fast stop 1: set FAST STOP TYPE 11 (63.1) = FAST STOP 1 Fast stop 2: set FAST STOP TYPE 11 (63.1) = FAST STOP 2 Fast stop 3: set FAST STOP TYPE 11 (63.1) = FAST STOP 3 When using Stand alone mode there is a signal FAST STOP 12, activated by digital input e.g. DI 10 (FAST STOP-N) = "0" (see function module CRANE (64) for more details), which can be programmed to give anyone of the three types of fast stop. This is done with parameter 63.2= FAST STOP TYPE 12. For settings of FAST STOP TYPE 12 see FAST STOP TYPE 11 above.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-17
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.5 Crane ( 64 ) Table 5-3 Stand Alone default I/O signal interface and functions. Signal Input Function (DI set in Group10) BRAKE ACKN DI6 Brake acknowledge from aux. Contact on brake contactor (and from brake) ZERO POS DI2 Zero position contact from joystick START DIR A DI7 Direction A (pos.) from joystick, to be (fixed) connected in series with Stop Lim A and contact from mechanical overload protection equipment START DIR B DI8 Direction B (neg.) from joystick, to be (fixed) connected in series with Stop Lim B and contact from slack rope protection equipment SLOWDOWN-N Ext DI9 Slow down lim A and B. Direction from START DIR inputs. After a power down (CPU init) only slow speed is possible until this input is ”1”. FAST STOP-N Ext DI10 Fast stop signal to the converter SPEED REF AI1 Speed reference signal from joystick. (fixed) 0-10 V for 0-100 % TORQ REF AI2 Torque reference signal from joystick. (fixed) 0-10 V for 0 to maximum torque reference (maximum set with Parameter 64.9 TORQ REF SCALE). SPEED CORR AI3 Speed Correction signal from e.g. (fixed) electric shaft control unit. 0 – (+/-)10V for 0 - (+/-)100% speed correction signal. BRAKE LIFT DO4 Output to brake contactor WATCHDOG-N DO5 Closed contact indicates ”healthy” drive. Open contact makes hardwired emergency stop; main contactor(s) off and brakes on.5-18 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description JOYSTICK MODE: When connecting a joystick directly to the drive I/O, parameter 64.10 CONTROL TYPE should be selected to "Joystick" (= default). ANALOGUE REF INPUTS: The analogue reference signal (0 - max. reference) is connected to Analogue input 1 for speed reference, and to Analogue input 2 for torque reference. The sign for the reference, speed as well as torque reference is given by inputs DI7 (Start Dir A) for positive reference and DI8 (Start Dir B) for negative reference. REFERENCE CURVE: The joystick for giving reference has parameters for setting of the deadzone in direction A and B (64.4 and 64.5). REF SHAPE (64.6) is for giving the reference a parabolic shape. Parameter set to ”0” = straight line, "20" = X2 and ”100” = X3 curve. JOYSTICK CHECKS: The drive is stopped (normal deceleration ramp if speed control) and prevented from a new start until the joystick is moved back to the neutral position, i.e. Zero Position (ZERO POS: e.g. DI2 = "1", DIR A: DI7 = "0" & DIR B: DI8 = "0") indicated longer than time ZERO POS OK TD (64.8), if any of following conditions (joystick or wiring problems) occur for a duration longer than JOYSTICK WARN TD(64.12): - START DIR A= ”1” and START DIR B=”1” at the same time. - SPEED REF is > 1V or TORQUE REF is > 1V when joystick is in the neutral position (ZERO POS = “1”, DIR A = "0" and DIR B = "0"). Indicates a possible loose ground connection. Panel also indicates this with an alarm text: “WARNING JOYSTICK” . START: The drive is started when one of the signals START DIR A or START DIR B is ”1” and ZERO POS is "0", unless any of the above listed fault conditions occur. The sequence starts with a magnetising phase = ON (unless already magnetised) which is immediately followed by the reference ramp-up. At a normal stop the switching off of the magnetising current is off- delayed by an adjustable time (parameter 65.2 OFF TD). SLOWDOWN: The speed is slowed down to a preset level (parameter SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF 64.7) if the SLOWDOWN-N input e.g. Ext DI9 is zero-set. The converter remembers the direction of movement and allows full speed in the opposite direction as long as the supply voltage (AMC board supply) is not switched off. If the voltage has been switched off and the input SLOWDOWN-N = ”0” than only slow speed is allowed in both directions. FAST STOP: When the FAST STOP-N input e.g. Ext DI10 changes to "0" (activates on a negative edge) while running, the drive is fast stopped (active in both speed and torque control). Three alternatives Fast Stop 1 = Torque limit braking, Fast Stop 2 = Torque limit and mechanical braking or Fast stop 3 = Mechanical braking can be selected by parameter FAST STOP TYPE 12 (63.2). After reaching zero speed and the "ZEROPOS" input has been set to ”1”, with a positive edge required for reset of fast stop condition, for a time longer than parameter ZERO POS OK TD, start of the drive is allowed. That is: the joystick must be returned to the neutral position for a minimum of 0.3 seconds (default value) before starting in other direction is possible.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-19
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description To avoid running in the same direction (hoisting after overload indication or lowering after slack rope indication) the appropriate direction input must be wired in series with an additional contact from the protection equipment. These contacts must be NO which are closed when the protection equipment is energised and opens when a fault occurs. TORQUE CONTROL is activated when the voltage level of input AI2 TORQ REF the first time (after each power on) passes the level 1V, and if the speed reference to AI1 is below 1V. Speed reference is activated the first time AI1 passes the level 1V (and after each power on = default). If both inputs are above limit, than speed control is active. Updating time for speed and torque references are 40 ms. SPEED CORRECTION: The additional speed reference input Speed Correction (AI3) is a reference without any ramp that is added to the output of the normal speed reference ramp generator. Can be used as a correction input from an "electric shaft" control unit. Updating time is 10 ms for the speed correction input. 0 V signal is 0 % reference level and the 0 – (+)10 V range corresponds to 0 – (+)100 % speed. 0 – (-) 10 V range corresponds to 0 - (-)100 % speed. The speed correction reference is limited so that the sum of the normal "ramped" speed reference and the speed correction reference cannot exceed Maximum/Minimum Speed setting (parameters 20.1 & 20.2). WATCHDOG: The signal WATCHDOG-N (digital output 5 as default) is used to indicate a healthy drive. This output is zero-set if the software detects any of the following faults: - Fieldbus communication fault - Brake long falling time – CPU stalls out If this relay output contact opens, the supply contactor to the converter must immediately be opened and the mechanical brakes applied by removing power from the brake contactor = emergency stop of the crane drive.5-20 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Fast stop-N (Ext DI10) Trigg "Speedref < 5%" S Fast stop 12 & R <Zero Pos OK TD> t 0 S Zero speed Running & R Zero pos (DI 2) Dir A (DI 7) Dir B (DI 8) & & <Joystick Warn TD> t 0 & >1 =1 & & Start & 1V Speed ref (AI 1) MAX Drive speed ref. <Deadzone> <Ref. shape> <Minimum ref.> < Speed ref. reduced> "0" Slowdown-N (Ext DI 9) INV <Abcd> = Parameter CRANE stand alone logic using Joystick Control type Figure 5-9 Crane Stand Alone logic in Joystick modeDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-21
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Radio control mode If the joystick is connected to and monitored by an external unit such as a Radio controller or PLC, then Control type "Radio Control" (parameter 64.10) can be used. The differences from "Joystick" control are: - The "Zero Pos" input signal (e.g. DI2) is not used/required. - If receiving both direction orders "Start Dir A" and "Start Dir B" at the same time, the start order and reference are interlocked while the error occurs, but no indication is given to the panel nor any requirement for both signals to be zero before releasing the interlock - No check of reference level is made before responding to the start order. Reference inputs for speed, torque and speed correction reference (AI1- AI3) have the same scaling and functions as in "Joystick" control mode. Fast stop-N (Ext DI 10) Trigg S Fast stop 12 "Speedref < 5%" R Zero speed & Dir A (DI 7) Dir B (DI 8) & Start =1 & Speed ref. (AI 1) MAX Drive speed ref <Minimum ref> < Speed ref. reduced> "0" Slowdown-N (Ext DI 9) INV CRANE stand alone logic using Radio Control Figure 5-10 Crane Stand Alone logic in Radio Control mode5-22 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Motorised Potentiometer control mode If using (for example) a pendant controller with push-buttons for start and increase speed, then Control Type (parameter 64.10) should be set to "Motor Pot". "Start Dir A" and "Start Dir B" contacts connects to DI7 & DI8. "Increase" contacts could be connected in parallel to e.g. DI2. The Drive will start and accelerate on ramp towards (+ or -) 100 % speed if both direction if the increase input is activated (= closed). If increase order is removed before reaching 100 % speed, drive will stop accelerating and run with the speed level reached. With a new increase order the drive will continue to accelerate towards 100 %. If direction order is removed, the drive will decelerate on ramp towards 0 % speed. Reclosing the direction contact before reaching 0 % speed will stop deceleration and hold speed at the level reached. Inputs AI1 and AI2 are inactive in this control mode. Other inputs have normal functions. Fast stop-N (Ext DI 10) Trigg S Fast stop 12 R Zero speed & Dir A (DI 7) Dir B (DI 8) & Start =1 & Increase (DI 2) 100% MAX Drive speed ref Ramp output <Minimum ref> < Speed ref. reduced> "0" Slowdown-N (Ext DI 9) INV CRANE stand alone logic using Motor Pot. control Figure 5-11 Crane Stand Alone logic in Motorised PotentiometDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-23
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program DescriptionStep joystick reference mode When using a step type joystick having reference contacts instead of an analogue potentiometer, the control mode STEP JOYST (parameter 64.10) should be used. Up to 4 different speed levels are supported, direction order giving first speed level + 3 more contacts for different speed levels. Contacts can be connected to selectable digital inputs (including extended I/O modules), see parameters 10.8 STEP REF2 SEL, 10.9 STEP REF3 SEL and 10.10 STEP REF4 SEL. The corresponding speed reference levels are set with parameters 64.13 SPEED REF LEVEL 1 up to 64.16 SPEED REF LEVEL 4. All lower step reference contacts must remain closed for next level to be active. Example: when closing contact corresponding to Step reference level 4, contacts for level 2 and level 3 must still be closed. Note that Zero Pos signal from joystick is required in this mode, similar to control mode JOYSTICK. Joystick monitoring function is active.Step radio reference mode When using a radio controller or PLC having step reference output contacts, the control mode STEP RADIO (parameter 64.10) can be used. Maximum 4 different speed levels available. Digital inputs and speed reference levels are selected as described above with Step Joystick mode. Zero Pos input signal is not required in this control mode. Joystick monitoring is not active.5-24 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.6 Logic handler ( 65 ) Contains logic for on-, off and start-order. On is the contactor on-command and start command releases speed and torque controllers. To get an On-order to the converter the signal ON must become ” 1”. This can only be obtained if no off order is issued which means if: - Electrical disconnect (DI4) = "1". - Converter is not tripped (FAULT = ” 0 ”) - The button ” 0 ” at the panel is not pushed (LOCAL OFF = ” 0 ”) When an "On signal" is given either in local mode with the panel LOCAL ON (I) or in remote mode with the signal DRIVE ON (fieldbus mode) or START DIR A/ START DIR B (stand-alone mode) to get the signal ON, then a signal Ready For Run is awaited, acknowledging that the contactors are on. If this acknowledgement is not received within 7 seconds the ON-order signal is reset to zero. Off order is given by the panel LOCAL OFF (0) at zero speed (off push- button on panel) or in external control when signal DRIVE ON is set to ”0” (field bus mode ). If parameter CONTIN ON (65.1) = ” false ” and running becomes ” 0 ” the ON signal will be reset to ” 0 ” after expired time OFF TD ( 65.2 ). This is a ” contactor shut-off ” function if the drive is not operated within the last OFF TD seconds. "Start order" is issued when START 2 = ” 1 ”. In remote mode the signal START OVR (Fieldbus mode) or START DIR A / START DIR B (stand- alone mode) is giving this (the start order). In local mode the start order is given with signal LOCAL START (start push-button on panel). No start order can be given unless the converter is "On" = contactors on, acknowledged by the signal Ready For Run. Signal REF ZERO SET will hold the speed reference to ” 0 ” when Fast Stop is ordered. See also timing and logic diagrams on the next 2 pages.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-25
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Start if contactors already on Figure 5-12 Start and stop sequence time diagram5-26 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description <OFF TD> Running t 0 <Contin on> Ready for run & <ON PULS TIME> Elec disc-N 0 t >1 Stop panel Zero speed & >1 Fault On "FieldBus" R On Start "Panel" TRIG Start "I/O" >1 S Start 2 Start "Fieldbus" >1 & Logic handler (65) Figure 5-13 Logic Handler logicDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-27
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.7 Torque proving (66) Torque proving is a function module included in the drive control to ensure, before releasing the brake and starting the crane operation, that the drive is able to produce torque, and that brakes are not slipping. The function module is mainly intended for hoist drives, but can also be used with other motions using encoder feedback. Torque proving is performed by giving a negative torque reference (downwards on hoist), with the brake applied. If the reaches the correct level, the reference changes sign, and the same test is performed in positive direction. If torque proving is successful in both directions. The brake is lifted, and the next step in the starting sequence is initiated. The time to execute the torque proving sequence is so short (approximately 100 ms) that the operator does not experience any time delay in the starting sequence. The torque proving is activated by setting: - TORQ PROV SEL (66.1) = ” True ” The torque proving reference, TORQ PROV REF (66.3) sets output signal TORQ PROV REF. The actual torque is read from signal 2.15=MOTOR TORQUE. When the torque proving is activated but not yet performed, the output signal TORQ PROV OK is ” 0 ”. The torque proving sequence starts when the input signal RUNNING is ” 1 ”, i. e. when the converter is started. When the torque proving sequence is completed the output signal TORQ PROV OK is set to ” 1 ”. If any fault is detected during the proving sequence, signal TORQ PROV OK does not go to ” 1 ” but output signal TORQ PROV FLT is set to ” 1 ” and the drive trips. A message is displayed on the drive panel and an indication given to the supervisory control. NOTE: Torque proving is not active (even if selected with parameter 66.1) if the drive is in torque control mode. <TORQ PROV SEL> Torq prov OK Motor torque S R >1 t 0 Torq prov flt Running & <TORQ PROV FLT TD> <TORQ PROV REF> Torq prov ref Torque proving (66) Figure 5-14 Torque Proving logic5-28 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.8 Mechanical brake control ( 67) The program supports electrical and mechanical braking to stop the motor. Electrical braking gives a controlled and smooth braking which is the most common way to bring a motor to stop. Mechanical braking should only be used in critical situations and if so there are two possibilities: - Emergency stop - Fast stop After the motor has come to zero speed (by electrical braking) the mechanical brake should be applied without unnecessary delay. In the starting sequence it is possible to set a time delay related to the brake actual lifting time (parameter 69.8 SPEED REF TD in Reference handler). The function module contains logic for controlling the mechanical brake. Output signal BRAKE LIFT is the brake lift order. Brake lift acknowledgement is received as input (e.g. DI6) BRAKE ACKN. Start sequence: A brake lift is initiated by a start order i. e. input signal START 2 = ”1” (from Logic handler function (65)). This will set output signal RUN = ”1” releasing speed & torque controllers. After receiving TORQ PROV OK = ” 1 ” and no stop orders are active the BRAKE LIFT is set ”1”. The brake lift order can be delayed with a time set by parameter BRAKE LIFT TD (67.4), this parameter is normally set to 0. Normal stop sequence: Removing the start order will set the reference to zero and the drive will ramp to zero speed (Reference handler). When the input signal ZERO SPEED = ”1” then BRAKE LIFT is set to zero. When receiving acknowledgement BRAKE ACKN = ”0” the RUN order is reset to ”0” after delay time BRAKE FALL TIME (67.1). Except at emergency stop (EMERG STOP = ” 1 ” when Power On Ackn = 0 in Fieldbus mode) and fast stop (FAST STOP = ” 1 ”) the brake module maintains the BRAKE LIFT and RUN order as long as ZERO SPEED is not detected. A brake fault, i.e. Brake Ackn (DI6) = 0 (during start or normal running) with a duration longer than setting of BRAKE FLT TD (67.2), activates an output signal BRAKE FLT that will trip the drive and indicate. A long falling time at stop (Brake Ackn =1) with a duration longer than setting of BRAKE LONG FT TD (67.5), provides indication with an output signal BRAKE LONG FTIME to: panel, Fieldbus statusword and activates the Watchdog output contact (DO5) to make an emergency stop of the drive. See also logic diagram on next page.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-29
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Torque prov OK Elec disc-N >1 <BRAKE LIFT Brake lift Running Fast stop & & & t 0 >1 Speed off Zero Speed & & On Start 2 >1 <BRAKE FALL & & RUN Brake ackn 0 t >1 <BRAKE FLT Brake fault & t 0 <BRAKE LONG FT Brake long fall time & t 0 Mechanical Brake Control (67) Figure 5-15 Mechanical Brake Control logic5-30 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.9 Power optimisation ( 68 ) "Base speed" is the highest speed for the hoist drive to carry full, rated load. Normally motor is selected to have a field weakening point about equal to Base speed. When increasing the motor speed above motor nominal speed=field weakening point (base speed), field weakening is used. Field weakening, however reduces the maximum available torque of the motor. To ensure that the motor will always be able to produce sufficient torque for controlling the load in the field weakening range, a maximum allowed speed is calculated. This function is called power optimisation. This means that for a heavy load the maximum allowed speed is less than that of a light load. If the power optimisation receives a signal HIGH SPEED OK, telling that maximum speed is allowed, the calculated maximum speed reference is used as input to the ramp unit and the motor will accelerate up to the corresponding speed. The power optimisation function module can only be used in drives with an active (pulling) load, i. e. in general only on hoist drives To be active the parameter POWOP SELECT(68.1) must be set ” True ”. Parameters TQLIM UP (68.6) and TQLIM DWN (68.7) are maximum load torque (power limits) in positive/negative running directions. When the speed, during acceleration towards base speed, has reached 90% of base speed the module makes a calculation (using speed and torque measurements during 320 ms before reaching 90% of base speed) of the maximum allowed speed by the formula: BASE SPEED * TQLIM maximum speed = TORQ HOLD TORQ HOLD is torque needed to hold the load, and is calculated by the module. If the module gets the order HIGH SPEED OK = ”1”, commonly given when the master switch is in its outermost position, output SPEED REF POWOP is set to the calculated maximum speed reference. The quality of the calculation depends on the measurements done before reaching 90% of base speed. The speed must have a linear acceleration and without excessive ripple. The output speed reference SPEED REF POWOP is set to zero if the input signal HIGH SPEED OK goes to zero. The calculated maximum reference is reset to zero when the actual speed SPEED ACT has decreased to a speed corresponding to the parameter POWOP RESET LEV (68.8) Commissioning instructions for the power optimisation. This is an instruction how to adjust the parameters INERTIA TOTAL UP (68.4) , INERTIA TOTAL DWN (68.5) , TQLIM UP (68.6) and TQLIM DWN (68.7). 1. Set the parameter POWOP SELECT (68.1) to ”True”DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-31
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description 2. Set the parameter TQLIM UP (68.6) to the rated torque of the motor (100%). 3. Temporarily set the parameter TQLIM DWN (68.7) to 75% of rated torque of the motor. The reason to set TQLIM DWN lower than TQLIM FLD WEAK UP is to get about same speed in positive and negative directions, with a certain load on the hoist. 4. The parameters INERTIA TOTAL UP and INERTIA TOTAL DWN are acceleration constants in positive and negative direction. Use a load that is 75 - 100% of full load. 5. Set parameter POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL (68.3) to ” true ”. The tuning part is now activated for one autotune cycle. 6. Start the drive with base speed reference only (from Local or External control) in positive (respectively negative) direction, and the motor will accelerate up to base speed. The motor will need to run at base speed for about 4 seconds until calculation is ready. If giving start and reference from External control place its recommended to disconnect HIGH SPEED OK signal during Autotune (in Standalone set par. 64.3=100%). Calculation is completed when actual signal no. 1.24 TOTAL INERTIA is showing a non-zero value. Stop the drive. 7. Read the actual signal no. 1.24 TOTAL INERTIA on the panel. Repeat this procedure 2-3 times in each direction and calculate the average value for parameter INERTIA TOTAL UP and INERTIA TOTAL DWN respectively. 8. Set this value to parameter INERTIA TOTAL UP (68.4) or INERTIA TOTAL DWN (68.5) depending upon the direction. Reconnect HIGH SPEED OK signal (i.e. in Standalone, set par. 64.3 back to 98%). 9. Check that the final speed in field weakening area for each autotune run in the same direction, is the same speed every time within 1-2 %. 10.Adjusting TQLIM UP and TQLIM DWN: Connect a load equal to the highest load specified to operate to max field weakening = 100% speed. Lower parameters TQLIM UP and TQLIM DWN to a low value, e.g. 40%. Testrun from joystick giving full reference up (resp. down). Check max speed reached. If not equal to 100%, than increase TQLIM UP (resp. TQLIM DWN) in steps of 5% until reaching 100% speed.5-32 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.10 Reference handler ( 69) The function module includes: - Setting of ramp times - Handling of speed references - Torque memory function Setting of ramp times can be made for both acceleration and deceleration and can be set differently for forward and backward (or upwards and downwards) with parameters: 69.2 ACC TIME FORW, 69.3 ACC TIME REV, 69.4 DEC TIME FORW and 69.5 DEC TIME REV. The possibility to use a scaling factor for the set ramp times is available in external (only in Fieldbus mode) and local control mode. In external control mode the scaling is done with signal RAMP SCALE from supervisory control, if parameter 69.10 "RAMP RATE=1" is set False. Parameter RAMP SCALE LOCAL (69.7) is used when running in local. Default setting is 2.0 (except for the Master drive in Master/Follower macro operation, then the setting is fixed at: 1.0), meaning that the actual ramp times when running in local control mode are double the settings of the ramp time parameters 69.2 - 69.5. Speed reference when running in external control mode: The drive is using the higher value from DRIVE SPEED REF or SPEED REF POWOP. The DRIVE SPEED REF is a reference up to base speed at start. Then if the power optimisation has calculated, for the actual load, that it is possible to run above base speed, it will use SPEED REF POWOP which brings the speed into the field weakening range. DRIVE SPEED REF should then normally be rescaled to ”follow” the maximum speed reached to have a smooth behaviour when decreasing the reference from the joystick (continuous gear). Speed reference when running in local control mode is SPEED REF LOCAL and the direction is chosen with the direction push-buttons on the panel. Speed reference output to speed controller can be delayed if having a slow acting brake (long lifting time) using the time SPEED REF TD (69.8). The ramp unit is equipped with an S-curve function, for "smoothing" both the beginning and the end of the ramp. S-curve time constant is set with parameter 69.6 S-RAMP TC. Parameter START TORQ SEL (69.9) is used for selecting type of torque memory function, to avoid "roll-back" at start on a hoist drive: NOT USED = No extra starting torque AUTO TQ MEM = Automatic torque memory will store the load torque needed when stopping and apply the same torque reference when starting again LOAD MEAS = Starting torque reference is received from a supervisory controller (LOAD MEAS REF) e.g. from a load cell. NOTE: signal LOAD MEASDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-33
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description SEL from Fieldbus command word should be set "true" to enable this reference The starting torque reference is connected to preset speed controller integration part before start. <Speed ref TD> Brake release ref t 0 Start 2 Local Speed ref local Drive speed ref MAX Speed ref powop "0" "0" <ACC TIME FORW> <DEC TIME FORW> <S-RAMP TC> 1 2 "0" Speed ref 3 Ref zero set Ramp hold 3 4 Fast zero set <DEC TIME REV> <ACC TIME REV> Reference handler (69) Figure 5-16 Reference Handler logic5-34 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.11 Position measurement ( 70 ) The function module is used to give a position measurement from a pulse encoder input. Position measurement can be used in both Fieldbus and Stand alone modes. The measurement can be synchronised to the value POS PRECOUNT PPU sent from the supervisory controller, either by signal PGMSYNC from the fieldbus Command word or from digital input hw-sync (parameter 10.6 SYNC SEL). Acknowledgement of synchronisation is done with the signal SYNC RDY to the supervisory controller. Reset of the acknowledgement is done with signal RESET SYNC RDY from the supervisory controller. Hardware synchronisation through e.g. DI.7 can be blocked if HW SYNC INHIBIT from supervisory controller = ” 1 ”. Synchronising edge of DI.7 is selected with parameter SYNC COND (70.2). Measurement value POS ACT PPU sent to the supervisory controller is the number of pulses counted divided with the value of parameter POS SCALE (70.1). The number of pulses counted depends upon the settings of parameters 50.2 SPEED MEAS MODE and 50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR. Default setting of SPEED MEAS MODE parameter is that both positive and negative edges from both A and B signals are counted. Example: If 50.4 is set to 1024 ppr and 50.2 is set to default: “A_-_B_-_”, then a total of 4*1024=4096 pulses are added per revolution of the pulse encoder.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-35
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.12 Field bus communication and Fieldbus words ( 71 ) Receive This part is used to receive signals from a superior controller via a high speed serial bus in the form of a Field Bus, e.g. Advant link (max 30 words/dir), AC31 (max 8 words/dir), Profibus (max 10 words/dir). The signal interface is standardised as a block of 7 words where each signal has its specific position. The module also includes one element for unpacking the Command word signal to 16 Boolean signals. Updating interval for datasets 1, 3 & 5 is 40 ms, except DRIVE SPEED REF and SPEED CORRECTION that are updated every 10 ms. For transmission of signals from drive to superior controller, see Fieldbus communication Transmit. Table 5-4 Receive Dataset 1 Word 1 DataSet 1 Word 1: Command Word Bit number Signal Range/Unit Description 0 = Bit 0, LSB COMTEST REC ”1” ”0” Comtest receive bit. 1 DRIVE ON ”1” ”0” Drive On from overriding control 2 HIGH SPEED ”1” ”0” High speed select 3 START OVR ”1” ”0” Start from overriding control 4 RAMP HOLD ”1” ”0” Ramp holding signal 5 SEPARATE ”1” ”0” Separate ctrl select signal (M/F ctrl) 6 TORQ CTRL SEL ”1” ”0” Torque control select signal 7 LOAD MEAS SEL "1" "0" Load measurement select (enable LOAD MEAS REF) 8 RESET OVR ”0 → 1” Reset from overriding (edge) control 9 FAST STOP 1 ”1” ”0” Fast stop 1 10 FAST STOP 11 ”1” ”0” Fast stop 11 type select 11 PGM SYNC ”0 → 1” Program (edge) synchronisation of position measurement 12 HW SYNC ”1” ”0” Hardware INHIBIT synchronisation inhibit 13 RESET SYNC ”1” ”0” Reset synchronisation READY ready 14 USER MACRO ”1” ”0” User macro 1 & 2 CHANGE (edge) change request or shared motion Motor1/Motor2 change request 15 = Bit 15, MSB ENABLE ”1” ”0” Enable fieldbus start & FIELDBUS CTRL reference during Standalone mode5-36 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Table 5-5 Receive DataSet 1 Word 2 Example: DS1.2 = DataSet 1, Word 2 DataSet.Word Signal Range/Unit Description (MFB) corresp. To 32767 DS1.2 DRIVE SPEED -163.84- Drive speed REF +163.84 reference (%) DS1.3 TORQ REF -327.67- Torque reference +327.67 signal (%Tn) DS3.1 RAMP RATE 0.00-32.767 Ramp rate scaling of the speed ramp times set in drive (normal=1.0=integer 1000 ) DS3.2 SPEED -163.84- Speed correction CORRECTION +163.84 signal (%) DS3.3 POS -32767- Preset value position PRECOUNT +32767 counter PPU (sync value) DS5.2 LOAD MEAS -327.67- Load measure REF +327.67 reference (%Tn) "SPEED" signals have scaling: 20 000 corresponds to 100 % (par. 69.1) "TORQUE" signals have scaling: 10 000 corresponds to 100 % of motor nominal torque. The communication is supervised continuously using a “toggle bit” received on bit 0 COMTEST REC: If ”next edge” is not received within a certain time COMTEST FLT TD (71.1), the MAS OSC FLT occurs and the drive trips. The drive is inverting the bit received from the superior controller (PLC): COMTEST REC and sending it back on transmission DS2.1 Bit 14 COMTEST TRA. NOTE: In the superior controller the received bit should be sent directly to the drive again without inverting and without delay (recommended updating time maximum 100 ms) PLC Serial communication DriveDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-37
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Transmit This part is used to transmit signals from the drive to a supervisory controller via high-speed serial bus in the form of a Field Bus, e.g. Advant link (max 30 words/dir), AC31 (max 8 words/dir), Profibus (max 10 words/dir) and ModbusPlus. The signal interface is standardised as a block of 14 words where each signal has its specific position. The module also includes elements for packing 16 Boolean signals to word signals. Updating interval for datasets 2 & 4 is 40 ms, except for signals SPEED ACT and POS ACT PPU that are updated every 10 ms. Updating interval for datasets 6, 8 & 10 is 120 ms. Table 5-6 Transmit DataSet 2 Word 1 DataSet 2 Word 1: Status Word Bit number Signal Range/Unit Description 0 = Bit 0, LSB RDY FOR ON ”1” ”0” Ready for on 1 ELEC DISC-N ”1” ”0” Electrical disconnect, DI4 2 RDY FOR RUN ”1” ”0” Ready for run 3 RUNNING ”1” ”0” Running 4 ZERO SPEED ”1” ”0” Zero speed 5 REM LOC ”1” ”0” Remote /Local (1= Remote) 6 TORQ PROV OK ”1” ”0” Torque proving OK 7 USER 1 OR 2 ”1” ”0” User macro 1 or 2 active 8 FAULT ”1” ”0” Fault 9 WARNING ”1” ”0” Warning 10 LIMIT ”1” ”0” Drive in torque limit 11 SYNC ”1” ”0” Sync input (e.g. DI7) status 12 SYNC RDY ”1” ”0” Synchronisation ready 13 BRAKE LONG ”1” ”0” Brake long falling FTIME time indication 14 COMTEST TRA ”1” ”0” Communication test transmit bit 15 = Bit 15, MSB SNAG LOAD ”1” ”0” Snag load indication5-38 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Table 5-7 Transmit DataSet 2 word 2 Example: DS2.2 = DataSet 2, Word 2 DataSet.Word) Signal Range/Unit Description corresp. to +/-32767 DS2.2 SPEED ACT -163.84- Speed actual (% of +163.84 parameter 69.1) DS2.3 TORQUE ACT -327.67- Torque actual (%Tn) +327.67 DS4.1 SPEED REF 3 -163.84- Speed reference 3 (% of +163.84 parameter 69.1) DS4.2 POS ACT PPU -32767- Position actual value +32767 DS4.3 MOTOR CURR -3276.7- Motor current (A) +3276.7 DS6.1 FAULT WORD1 Application faults DS6.2 FAULT WORD2 Motor control faults DS6.3 FAULT WORD 3 Motor control faults DS8.1 ARM VOLT -327.67- Armature voltage (% of +327.67 parameter 42.6) DS8.2 FIELD CURR 1 -327.67- Field current Motor 1 (% +327.67 of parameter 41.3) DS8.3 FIELD CURR 2 -327.67- Field current Motor 2 (% +327.67 of parameter 41.17) DS10.1 ALARM WORD 1 Motor control warnings DS10.2 ALARM WORD 2 Application & Motor control warnings DS10.3 FAULT WORD 4 Motor control faults. DS12.1 AUX STATUS Auxiliary Status Word WORD DS12.2 AI1 REF VALUE -327.67- Analog Input 1 reference +327.67 value (% of 10V) Scalings: SPEED ACT & SPEED REF 3 : Integer 20000 = 100 % of par. 69.1 TORQUE ACT: Integer 10000 = 100 % of motor nominal torque (Tnom(Nm) = 9550 * Pnom(kW) / nnom(rpm), where Pnom(kW) = Unom(V) * Inom(A)) MOTOR CURR: Integer 10 = 1.0 Amp ARM VOLT: Integer 10000 = 100 % of parameter 42.6 FIELD CURR x: Integer 10000 = 100 % of parameter 41.3 resp. 41.17DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-39
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Table 5-8 Fault Word 1 Dataset 6 Word 1 FAULT WORD1 = Dataset 6, Word 1: Bit number Signal (panel Description fault text) 0 = Bit 0, LSB MOT OVERSP Motor overspeed fault 1 TORQ FLT Torque fault 2 BRAKE FLT Mechanical brake fault 3 4 TORQ PR FLT Torque proving fault 5 MAS OSC FLT Fieldbus "oscillator" (toggle) bit fault 6 7 8 EXTERNAL FLT External fault 9 MF COMM ERR Master/Follower bus communication fault 10 PANEL LOSS Panel communication fault 11 12 13 14 MF RUN FLT Master/Follower running fault 15 = Bit 15, MSB MASTER FLT Comm module communication faultCombined fault words Table 5-9 Fieldbus Dataset 6 Word 2 FAULT WORD2 = Dataset 6, Word 2: Bit number Signal (panel Description fault text) 0 =Bit 0, LSB 01 AUX UVOLT Auxil. Under voltage 1 02 OVERCURR Overcurrent 2 28 ARM OVOLT Armature over voltage 3 04 CONV TEMP Converter overtemp 4 05 EARTH FLT Earth fault 5 06 MOT1 TEMP Motor 1 overtemp. (measured) 6 07 MOT1 LOAD Motor 1 overload (thermal model) 7 44 NO I/O I/O board not found 8 48 MOT2 TEMP Motor 2 overtemp. (measured) 9 27 MOT2 LOAD Motor 2 overload (thermal model) 10 11 29 MAIN UVLT Mains under voltage 12 30 MAIN OVLT Mains over voltage 13 31 NO SYNC Not in synchronism 14 32 FEX1 OCUR Field Ex. 1 overcurr. 15 = Bit 15, MSB 33 FEX1 COMM Field Ex. 1 comm. error5-40 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Table 5-10 Fieldbus Dataset 6 Word 3 FAULT WORD3 = Dataset 6, Word 3: Bit number Signal (panel Description fault text) 0=Bit 0, LSB 34 CURR RIPP Arm. current ripple 1 35 FEX2 OCUR Field Ex. 2 overcurr. 2 36 FEX2 COMM Field Ex. 2 comm. error 3 38 FHAS SEQU Phase sequence fault 4 39 NO FIELD No field ack. / field current too low 5 14 SPD MEAS Speed meas fault 6 40 NO E FAN No ext. FAN ack. 7 41 NO M CONT No main cont. ack. 8 17 TYPE CODE Type coding fault 9 10 50 NO C FAN No C FAN ack 11 DDCS channel 0 communication fault 12 42 FEX1 FLT Field Ex. 1 Not O.K. 13 43 FEX2 FLT Field Ex. 2 Not O.K. 14 23 MOT STALL Motor stalled 15 = Bit 15, MSB 37 OVERSPEED Motor overspeed Table 5-11 Fieldbus Dataset 10 Word 3 FAULT WORD4 = Dataset 10, Word 3: Bit number Signal (panel Description fault text) 0=Bit 0, LSB 65 REVER FLT Reversal fault 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 SYSTEM FAULT System fault in AMC-DC board 8 9 SW MISMATCH Mismatch of CON- and AMC-DC-software 10 CON COMMUNIC SDCS-CON-2 communication fault 11 M/F LINK Master/Follower link communication fault 12 13 PANEL LOSS Control panel link fault 14 18 CON FLASH CON FLASH memory fault 15 = Bit 15, MSB 20 CON SYS System fault in CON-2 boardDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-41
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Table 5-12 Fieldbus Dataset 10 Word 1 ALARM WORD1 = Dataset 10, Word 1: Bit number Signal (panel Description fault text) 0=Bit 0, LSB 01 START INH Start inhibition 1 02 EMER STOP Emergency stop 2 3 05 CONV TEMP Conv. Overtemp. alarm 4 5 03 MOT1 TEMP Motor 1 overtemp. alarm 6 04 MOT1 LOAD Motor 1 overload alarm 7 8 23 MOT2 TEMP Motor 2 overtemp. alarm 9 24 MOT2 LOAD Motor 2 overload alarm 10 18 MAIN UVLT Mains undervolt. alarm 11 M/F LINK Master / follower link alarm 12 26 CONV FAN Conv. fan ack. alarm 13 20 CURR DEV Arm. Current deviation alarm 14 15=Bit 15, MSB 27 EXT FAN Ext. fan ack. alarm Table 5-13 Fieldbus Dataset 10 Word 2 ALARM WORD2=Dataset 10, Word 2 Bit number Signal (panel Description fault text) 0=Bit 0, LSB 1 29 TYPE CODE Type code changed 2 32 UVOLT Aux. Undervoltage alarm 3 4 5 MASTER FLT Comm module alarm 6 JOYSTICK Joystick alarm 7 SPEED SCALE Speed scaling (69.01) out of range 8 MOT CH BLOCK Shared motion Motor Change Blocked 9 10 21 CON SYS CON communication alarm (2ms timeout) 11 CH0 COMMUN DDCS channel 0 communication alarm 12 13 PANEL LOSS Panel loss alarm 14 15=Bit 15, MSB5-42 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Table 5-14 Fieldbus Dataset 12 Word 1 AUX STATUS WORD=Dataset 12, Word 1 Bit number Signal (panel Description fault text) 0=Bit 0, LSB DIR A Start Direction A (DI7) ordered 1 DIR B Start Direction B (DI8) ordered 2 ZERO POS Zero Position (e.g. DI2) ordered 3 SLOWDOWN A Slowdown Direction A active 4 SLOWDOWN B Slowdown Direction B active 5 "not used" 6 BRAKE LIFT Brake Lift order (def. DO4) 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15=Bit 15, MSB NOTE: Bits 0 – 4 are I/O information signals in Standalone mode used with SwayControl (+ controlling Command word DS1.1 bit 15 "Enable Fieldbus Ctrl")DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-43
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.13 Shared motion (80) Shared motion is used to control two different motors (called Motor 1 and Motor 2) with same converter. Armature circuit is switched between the two motors using contactors (not controlled by DCC 600). Converter also to be equipped with dual Field exciters (FEX2 + FEX3 or qty 2 FEX3). Note 1: Internal field exciter (FEX2) can only be used with Motor 1. Note 2: EMF control (field weakening) is only available for Motor 1. See also sections 6.4 and 6.8 for more info. For Motor 2 there is a possibility to set 34 individual parameters in parameter Group 80. These becomes available (group opened) if setting parameter 16.6 Shared Motion Sel = Yes. Note: Parameter 15.5 (User Macro Ch Srce) must be set = "Not Sel" to enable switching to Group 80 parameters for Motor 2. Switching between Motor 1 and Motor 2 is ordered with bit 14 (User Macro Change) in Fieldbus Command word DS1.1 . It’s not possible to use digital input signal for selection. Switching is only done if following conditions are both fulfilled: - Running = 0 (i.e. drive must be stopped) - Zero Speed = 1 (i.e. motor must indicate zero speed, see par. 61.1 & 61.2) If not fulfilled an Alarm "MOT CH BLOCK" will be indicated (only if Rdy For Run = 1). Bit set = 0 is ordering normal parameters = parameters for Motor 1. Bit set = 1 is ordering parameters for Motor 2 to be loaded, i.e. parameter group 80 settings. This signal also controls the switching of Field exciter control between Field exciter 1 and Field exciter 2 (e.g. the reduced field for "non-active" field exciter). Also switching between Motor thermal overload monitors 1 and 2 is done by this signal (see section 6.12.2). An indication of active selection can be seen in signal 1.11 "Motor Selected". Switching time is typically approx. 500 ms. Motor 2 selection can be forced, e.g. during commissioning, by setting parameter 16.6 = FORCE MOT 2. Note: An alternative way to have dual parameter sets for Motor 1 and Motor 2 is to use the "User Macro" functionality (slower: 1 - 2 sec), see section 5.7 .5-44 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.6.14 Master/Follower ( 72 ) General The Master/Follower is a load sharing Application and is designed for applications in which the system is run by two DCC 600 drives and the motor shafts are coupled to each other via gearing, rail, shaft, etc. The Master/Follower application is then controlling the load distribution between the drives. The Master drive is sending order signals and references (speed and torque) through the Master/Follower bus to the Follower drive. The Master is also reading back status information from the Follower drive to ensure a safe operation. The Master/Follower application can be used for both hoist and travel motions, in both Fieldbus mode and Standalone mode. The Master station shall always be speed controlled and the Follower station normally be Torque controlled. Checklist for a Quick Start-up The installation procedure of the DCC 600 is explained in the Installation Manual. A checklist for start-up of the Master/Follower application is given below: 1 Switch off the power supplies to the DCC 600 units. 2 Build the M/F link, Master Ch2 to Follower Ch2. See Figure 5-17 Master/Follower wiring information for Stand Alone application. NOTE: Optical fibers for Master/Follower bus to be ordered separately! 3 Connect the external control signals to the Master. 4 Switch on the power supplies. 5 Activate M/F control Macro in both DCC 600 drives (Parameter 99.2 Application Macro = M/F CTRL) 6A Stand Alone Mode In the Master set parameters: - Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to True - Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Master. In the Follower set parameter: - Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to True - Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Follower. - Torque Selector (Parameter 72.2) to Torque - Brake Int Ackn (Parameter 67.3) to TrueDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-45
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description 6B Fieldbus mode In the Master set parameter: - Enable Comm module (Parameter 98.2) - Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to False - Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Master. In the Follower set parameter: - Enable Comm module if required (Parameter 98.2) - Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) to False - Master/Follower Mode (Parameter 72.1) to Follower. - Torque Selector (Parameter 72.2) to Torque - Brake Int Ackn (Parameter 67.3) to True 7 Set all application parameters in both drives LOC 8 Switch the DCC 600 units to external control with the REM - key on the Control Panel (there should be no L on the first row of the display). Reset both drives. 9 Perform the test run with the motors still de-coupled from the driven machinery. For this test temporary set the Follower in speed control mode (Parameter 72.2 Torque Selector = Speed). Give the control signals both through the Master DCC 600 analogue/digital inputs (or fieldbus inputs) and from the Masters Control Panel. Check the correct operation of the Master and Follower drives visually (motor & Control Panel display): • Start and Stop signals to the Master are received by the drives. • The Master follows the speed reference given • The Follower follows the master speed reference. 10 The Control Panel on the Follower is not active and can not control the drive. 11 Change Follower back to Torque mode (set Parameter 72.2 Torque) 12 Switch off the power supplies. 13 Couple the motor shafts to the driven machinery and switch on the power supplies.5-46 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Stand Alone mode The external control signals are connected to the drive concerned. The Master controls the Follower via a fiber optic serial communication link. DCC 600 DCC 600 RO4 Brake lift RO4 Master Drive Follower Drive RO5 Watch dog-N RO5 Watch dog-N Speed ref. AI 1 Brake ack. DI 6 Zero Pos. DI 2 Dir A DI 7 Dir B DI 8 Slowdown-N DI 9 Fast Stop-N DI 10 CH2 CH2 Tx Rx Tx Rx Figure 5-17 Master/Follower wiring information for Stand Alone applicationDCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-47
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Fieldbus Mode The Master, which is controlled from the Fieldbus, controls the Follower via a fiber optic serial communication link. The external control signals are connected to the drive concerned. (DI1 – DI8) DCC 600 DCC 600 Master Drive RO4 Brake lift Follower Drive RO4 Brake ack. RO5 Watch dog-N RO5 Watch dog-N DI6 El disc DI4 Sync DI7 El disc DI4 Sync DI7 CH0 CH2 CH2 CH0 Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Tx Rx Rx Tx Rx Tx NxxA NxxA Fieldbus Fieldbus adapter adapter modul modul Figure 5-18 Master/Follower wiring information for Fieldbus application5-48 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program DescriptionOperation:Master and Follower Stations The default settings of the Master/Follower Control macro parameters does not define the station as Master or Follower. The selection is done with parameter 72.1 Master/Follower mode. If Follower operation is selected the convertor can not be operated from the panel.Redundancy operation If one motion is driven by two mechanically coupled motors with separate DCC 600 in Master/Follower mode separate operation of Master or Follower drive can be used for redundancy operation. The drives can be run separately by using User Macro 1 for normal Master/Follower operation. (Parameter 99.2 = M/F CTRL) and User Macro 2 for redundancy operation (Parameter 99.2 = CRANE). Brake to be controlled by both drives.Fieldbus Mode Separate operation In Fieldbus mode the bit SEPARATE in the Control word can also be used for changing from Master/Follower operation to normal, non- Master/Follower operation. Brake to be controlled by both drives. Both drives control boards must be powered and the Master/Follower optic bus are active.Follower Panel operation The Follower drive can be operated separately from the Control Panel or DrivesWindow, e.g. during maintenance, by setting parameter 72.2 Torque Selector = OFF in Follower drive.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-49
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description Master/Follower link Specification Size of the Link: One Master and one Follower station can be connected. Transmission medium: Fiber Optic Cable. • Construction: Plastic core, diameter 1 mm, shielded with plastic jacket • Attenuation: 0.31 dB/m • Maximum length between Stations: 10 m • Other: Parameter Minimum Unit o Storage Temperature -55 +85 C o Installation Temperature -20 +70 C Short Term Tensile Force 50 N Short Term Bend Radius 25 mm Long Term Bend Radius 35 mm Long Term tensile Load 1 N Flexing 1000 cycles Various lengths of fiber optic cables are available as optional add-on kit for the DCC 600.Connectors on the NAMC board: Blue - receiver (hp 9534, T-1521); grey – transmitter (hp 9534, R-2521)Serial Communication Type: Synchronous, full duplexTransmission Rate: 4 Mbit/sTransmission Interval: 4 msProtocol: Distributed Drives Communication System, DDCS5-50 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 5 – Crane Program Description5.7 User Macros User Macros allow the current parameter settings to be stored in memory. Two User Macros can be created. To store your customised parameters: 1. Access the Start-up Data group as described in Table 2-6 in Chapter 2 - Overview of DCC 600 Programming. 2. Change Parameter 99.2 APPLICATION MACRO to USER1 SAVE or USER2 SAVE. 3. Press ENTER to save. 4. The storing takes 0.5 – 2 min. Please wait until parameter 99.2 has changed to "USER 1 LOAD" or "USER 2 LOAD". The current settings are now stored in the User Macro. The storing will take a few minutes, please wait. The Parameter settings can be changed thereafter without loosing the settings saved to the User Macro. After power switch off, when you turn on the power again the original User Macro settings are valid. (With other Application Macros the parameter setting will be permanently saved when you press ENTER after changing the parameter value and during power up default values of the parameters are not restored.) To recall the last saved parameters (User Macro): 1. Access the Start-up Data group as described in Table 2-6 in Chapter 2 - Overview of DCC 600 Programming. 2. Change Parameter 99.2 APPLICATION MACRO to USER1 LOAD or USER2 LOAD. 3. Press ENTER to load. If you try to load, but the User Macro doesnt exist, a fault indication is displayed:  0+?6>  ?=/< 7+-<9 The User Macros can also be switched via digital inputs or Fieldbus by Parameter 16.5 as described in chapter 7. The User Macro used can be changed via a digital input or Fieldbus communication (edge triggered) only after the drive is stopped i.e. Running = 0. During the change the drive will not start. The acknowledgement signal USER 1 OR 2 (digital output or Fieldbus) indi- cates when the change is completed and the drive can be started again. NOTE: User Macro load restores also the motor settings of Start-up Data group. Check that the settings correspond to the motor used.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 5-51
    • 6 Chapter 6 – DC Converter Functions6.1 Overview This chapter includes descriptions of the general DC converter functions like: Start and Stop logic, Field exciters, EMF control, Analog and Digital I/O, Converter and Motor monitoring functions. It also contains reference diagrams showing some available signals and parameters.DCS 600 Firmware Manual 6-1
    • 6-2 SPEED REFERENCE CHAIN 6.2 Diagrams LOCAL FIELDBUS AI SPEED SELECT AN IN 1 VALUE ADAPTER AN IN 2 VALUE ACCELERATION COMM MODULE LOCAL COMPENSATION SPEED CONTROL Datasets 1, 3, 5 AN IN 3 VALUE 98.02 AN IN 4 VALUE Selector LOCAL REF1 AN IN TACHO VALUE MCW 0 TORQ ACC COMP REF REF1 REF2 1.12 Datasets 2, 4, 6 SPEED REF 23.04 ACC COMP DER TIME SPEED CORR RAMP 0 MSW ACC COMPFILT TIME ACT1 RAMPED INCH REF 0 Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions ACT2 DROOP RATE 2.02 SPEED REF 3 72.07 USED SPEED REF CONST SPEED 2 (INCHING 2) Figur 6-1 2.03 SPEED REF 4 CONST SPEED 1 (INCHING 1) Speed limits 20.01 and 20.02 ACC/DEC/SHAPE apply here also SPEED SHARE 100% LIMITER "1" - SPEED PID- CONTROLLER REF 2 RAMP SPEED STEP 23.06 "1" + TORQUE DER REF 2.01 + TORQUE PROP REF WINDOW 2.05 EMF 0 FB CW:B4 HOLD D 20.01 MINIMUM SPEED FILTER SPEED 0 LIMITER 20.02 MAXIMUM SPEED MEASUREMENT 69.02 ACC TIME FORW PULSE 1 ACC TIME REV 1.20 + 2.10 69.03 2 FILTER + ENCODER DEC TIME FORW TORQ REF2 3 69.04 SPEED SPC TORQMAX INTERFACE reserved 2.04 4 CORRECTION DEC TIME REV (-1) PI SPC TORQMIN 20000 = 1.01 69.05 69.01 SPEED SCALING RPM Speed SPEED TORQUE INTEG REF 69.06 S-RAMP TC 2.06 scaling SPEED ERROR FILT ERROR 50.02 SPEED MEAS MODE 23.05 SP ACT FILT TIME BAL REF TACHO AI1 69.07 RAMP SCALE LOCAL NEG 50.03 SPEED FB SEL WINDOW INTG ON BAL_NCONT 69.10 RAMP RATE=1 50.04 ENCODER PULSE NR MOTOR SPEED 72.05 WINDOW WIDTH POS SPC TORQMAX DV/DT SPC TORQMIN 72.06 WINDOW WIDTH NEG KPS FILTER 23.01 KPS MOTOR SPEED KPS MIN Speed reference chain CON FILT KPS WEAKPOINT TORQ REF 2 AMC 1.02 SPEED KPS WP FILT TIME AI3 200ms SP ACT FILT FTC ACTUAL 23.02 KPS, TIS TIS TIS INIT VALUE KPS VAL MAX SPEED KPS TIS MIN SPEED KPS DIGITAL KPS TIS MAX SPEED TIS INPUT START / STOP 3.01 3.01 = FB SW = Field Bus Status Word KPS VAL MIN SPEED CONTROL TIS VAL MIN SPEED TIS VAL 3.08 3.08 = FB CW = Field Bus Command Word MIN SPEED 23.03 motor speed DERIVATION TIME CDP312 or KPS TIS MAX SPEED DERIV. FILT TIME DRIVES KPS TIS MIN SPEED WINDOW LOCAL CTRL PANEL DIGITAL Note: Empty "boxes" indicates signals/parameters not visible in DCC 600 OUTPUTS dcs_600docufig_1.dsfDCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • TORQUE CONTROL CHAINDCC 600 Firmware Manual TORQUE REFERENCE FILTER SELECTOR TORQ REF A TORQUE STEP 24.03 TORQUE LIMITER TORQUE SELECTOR M/F 72.02 TORQ REF 5 TORQ USED REF 0 0 72.08 TORQ REF A FTC 2.14 21 LOAD COMPENSATION TORQ LIMITER 3 4 REF 4 72.03 TORQ REF 1 MIN 5 6 2.09 LOAD SHARE TORQ REF 3 20.05 MAXIMUM TORQUE MAX LOCAL TREF TORQMAX 2.11 MINIMUM TORQUE 20.06 TREF TORQMIN SPEED CONTROLLE R OUTPUT TC TORQMAX TORQ REF B RAMPING + TC TORQMIN AI2 or TORQ REF 2 2.10 + Fieldbus LOCAL TORQUE REF (LOCAL REF 2) 24.01 TORQ RAMP UP 24.02 TORQ RAMP DOWN AMC CON Analogue inputs Analogue outputs Figur 6-2 Torque reference chain AI 1,2,3 A AIx A AN IN X VALUE [AN OUT x INDEX] + D AN IN TACHO VALUE AO1 D D + (AO2) A ANOUT x OFFS VOLT SCALE AIX AN IN TACH HI VAL AN IN TACH LO VAL AN OUT x NOM VOLT AN IN TACHO VALUE (signal) 1.26 AN OUT x NOM VAL AN IN TACH HI VAL (at +10V) 13.04 AN IN 1 VALUE (signal) 1.18 SCALE AI1 13.01 AN IN TACH LO VAL (at -10V) 13.05 AN OUT 1 INDEX 14.09 AN IN 2 VALUE (signal) 1.19 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL 14.08 SCALE AI2 13.02 ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT 14.07 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT 14.06 AN IN 3 VALUE (signal) 1.20 SCALE AI3 13.03 AN OUT 2 INDEX 14.13 AN OUT 2 NOM VAL 14.12 ANOUT 2 OFFS VOLT 14.11 dcs_600docufig_2.dsf AN OUT 2 NOM VOLT 14.10 6-3 Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions
    • 6-4 U_SUPPLY 42.06 ARMATURE CURRENT CONTROL Mains Voltage 1.08 MAINS VOLT ACT Measurem. MAX FIRING ANGLE Converter ALPHA_MAX Current 1.04 CONV CUR ACT M N = 10000 CUR LIM MOT BRIDGE 20.14 Measurem. Calc. M max = 3.2 * M N 20.12 CURRENT CONTROLLER FIRE UNIT TORQ USED REF CUR REF 3 PI-IP HL HL + CONV NOM CURR 2.14 CUR REF 2 2.16 di/dt SCALE - CONTROL TYPE SEL PI FIRING ANGLE 0 LL LL ARM CUR PI P-GAIN 43.02 Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions TORQUE MOTOR NOM 99.05 CUR REF SLOPE CORRECTION ARM CUR PI I-GAIN 43.03 20.15 VOLTAGE 41.10 20.13 DISCONT CUR LIMIT 43.06 MIN FIRING ANGLE MOTOR NOM 99.06 CUR LIM GEN BRIDGE CURRENT SELECTED BRIDGE FLUX REF FLD WEAK LOAD CUR ACT Armature Current 4096== Motor nominal current Measurem. LOAD CUR ACT FILT EMF REF SEL 0 VOLT ACTUAL RL EMF VOLT ACT M M EMF V REF 1 1.09 Calc. 4096 = 100% of MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2 I_MOTx_FIELD_A FLUX REF EMF EMF ACT FILT TC EMF 46.06 0 CONTROLLER FLUX REF SUM Field EMF REF Current 1.06 FIELD CUR M1 USED FEX TYPE Measurem. FLUX/FIELD 15.05 1,2,4,5,6,7, V ref Modification EMF CON KP 46.03 LINEARIZATION Field 0 8,9,10,11,12,13 INT EMF REF EMF CON KI 46.04 Current FIELD CUR M2 1.07 Figur 6-3 Armature current control 1 V LIM P FIRST 41.19 EMF CON BLOCK FIELD EXCITER Measurem. 2 MUX V LIM N LEV 46.05 3 V REF SLOPE FIELD CUR REF M1 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR 41.03 AI V REF via drive logic V COR V REF 2 V STEP 46.11 FIELD 2 REF FLD CUR @40% FLUX 41.14 FLUX COR FLD CUR @70% FLUX SECOND 3,4 41.15 FIELD EXCITER FLD CUR @90% FLUX FLUX REF 41.16 FIELD CUR REF M2 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR 41.17 FLUX CONTROL FLUX REF FLD WEAK MOTOR SPEED 1.01 dcs_600docufig_3a.ds4 MOTOR NOM SPEED 99.08 MAXIMUM FLUXDCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.3 Start and stop sequences Fieldbus mode The drive is controlled by control and status words. In order to control the drive in a proper way, a "hand shaking" sequence for the logic is necessary. The main functions of the hand shaking sequence is described here. An overriding control system uses COMMAND WORD to command the drive, and STATUS WORD to read the actual status of the drive å-mark with a number describes the order of the instructions. The overriding control system can be an APC, AC80, field bus interface, ...6.3.1 Start the drive OVERRIDING (PLC) DRIVE COMMAND WORD STATUS WORD 3.08 3.01 When the drive is ready to close the main contactor, the drive sets the bit RDY FOR ON å Ô RDY FOR ON = 1 ON-order is given ON = 1 Õ  Drive closes the contactors for the converter and motor fans, the field exciter contactor and the main contactor. After checking mains voltage, phase sequence and all acknowledges, program sets the RDY FOR RUN bit. ê Ô RDY FOR RUN = 1DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-5
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions START-order is given START = 1 Õ ‚ Drive releases references and controllers. ƒ Ô RUNNING = 1 The overriding system operates the drive by setting desired speed reference, torque reference etc.6.3.2 Stop the drive The drive can be stopped in two ways, either taking off the "ON"-command which opens contactors as fast as possible or by following next sequence: OVERRIDNING (PLC) DRIVE COMMAND WORD STATUS WORD STOP-order is given START = 0 Õ å Drive stops by coasting. It sets the bit Ô  RUNNING = 0 The overridning system can keep "ON" command "1" if it is needed to start the drive rapidly OFF-order is given ON = 0 Õ ê Drive stops by coast stop. The main, field, fan and brake contactors are opened. The drive sets the bit ‚ Ô RDY FOR RUN = 06-6 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.4 Field Excitation DCS600 has a possibility to use several kinds of field exciters or combinations of them, depending on the application. This chapter explains the basic differences of various field exciters. Functions using field exciters are also explained in this chapter. EXTERNAL FIELD Acknowledge EXCI TER field exciter DCS600 MultiDrive Converter Field I/O- r efere nce card s CONTROL CARD SCDS-CON-2 -flux control, field refe rence -field logic -EMF-con trol - D CF5 03 /50 4 X16 - D CS6 0 0 RS-485 X14 RS-485 X14 X14 Field monitoring Control Control SD CS -FEX-2 SD CS -FEX-1 FIELD M MOTOR 1 dcs_600docufig_20.ds4 Figur 6-4 Basic parts of the field excitation.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-7
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.4.1 Field exciter type selection The used type of the field exciter is selected by parameter USED FEX TYPE (15.05) 0 No field exciter selected 1 Internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1 2 Internal SDCS-FEX-2, or external DCF503/504 3 external DCF503/504 as a second field exciter 4 internal SDCS-FEX-2, or external DCF503/504, as a first field exciter and external DCF503/504 as a second field exciter. 5...8 other field exciter, acknowledge through Dix (Not used). 9...13 other field exciter, acknowledge through Aix (Not used). The program by-passes the field acknowledge signal when "No field exciter" is selected. This selection is intended for testing purposes. Two field exciters are used with the function "Shared motion", see point 6.4.5 below.6.4.2 Internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1 The current setpoint when using SDCS-FEX-1 is selected by adjusting appropriate voltage output from the field autotransformer. The program does not measure the current value but an acknowledge signal flags whether the field exciter has current or not. No more parameter settings are needed. If the current stucks at zero more than 6 second after "ON" -command is given, the drive will trip with fault indication: 39 NO FIELD.6.4.3 Internal field exciter SDCS-FEX-2 Internal field exciter SDCS-FEX-2 is a half controlled bridge that can control the field current with one (positive) direction. Due to the nature of the half controlled bridge, a very small amount of current (5...10%) always flows through the bridge if the field contactor is closed. SDCS-FEX-2 is controlled via the serial communication link. SDCS-FEX-2 measures field current and sends the value to the drive via serial communication. The measured field current is used to generate an acknowledge signal. If the field current exceeds the trip level, the drive will trip with fault indication: 32 FEX1 OCUR. If the current level drops below the minimum field current, the controllers are blocked after delay time 2 seconds and the drive will with fault indication: 39 NO FIELD. If the current stucks at zero more than 6 second after "ON" - command is given, the drive will also trip with fault indication: 39 NO FIELD.6.4.4 External field exciters DCF503/504 External field exciter DCF504 can control the field current both in positive and negative direction. The desired direction is defined by the sign of the field current reference. A positive sign means "forward" bridge and negative sign "reverse" bridge. The field current supervision logic is handled in a similar way as with SDCS-FEX-2.6-8 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.4.5 Two field exciters at the same time, field current references When the same converter controls two motors as a "shared motion", the converter is switched between two motors by means of an extra contactor. Both motors have still their own field exciter. In the documents the main motor field exciter is called "first field exciter", while the second motor field exciter is called "second field exciter". Motor heating function is possible for the unused motor by means of a reduced field current reference.6.4.6 Settings For proper operation of the field excitation, setting of the nominal field current is mandatory. The other parameters are normally not needed to change. The nominal current of field exciters MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR (41.03) MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR (41.17) The minimum field current level FIELD 1 MIN TRIP (44.17) FIELD 2 MIN TRIP (44.22) default value: 50% of rated current The delay of the minimum field trip is 2 seconds which is the maximum time, the field current is allowed to be below the minimum field current level. The overcurrent level FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV (20.16) FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV (20.17) default value: 115% of rated current6.4.7 Field Reduction on Stand-Still The motor field can be reduced at a stand-still situation in order to avoid overheating if the motor isn’t running. The function is activated by means of two parameters: FLD 1 HEAT SEL (15.11) Selection for first motor FLD 2 HEAT SEL (15.12) Selection for second motor in case of shared motion. The used current references are selected by means of two parameters: FIELD 1 REF RED (44.13) Reference for first motor FIELD 2 REF RED (44.21) Reference for second motor in case of shared motion. The function is activated when - "ON"-command is "1", so the main contactor is closed - the drive is in RDYREF -state. - 10 seconds elapsed.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-9
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.4.8 Field Heating at "OFF"-State The motor field can have a small value in order to avoid condensation when motor is in "OFF"-state. The function can be activated by means of parameter: FIELD HEAT SEL (15.10) The used current references are the same as with the field reduction function: FIELD 1 REF RED (44.13) reference for first motor FIELD 2 REF RED (44.21) reference for second motor in case of shared motion. The function is activated when command "ON" is "0" (main contactor open). The function closes the field contactor.6-10 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.4.9 Field current / motor FLUX linearisation If there is need to control accurate torque, the field current is to be linearised. This is caused by the non-linear relation of motor flux and field current due to saturation effects of the field winding. Motor flux Id dcs_600docufig_21.ds4 Figure 6--5 Flux of DC-motor vs field current. The magnetisation of the motor starts to saturate after certain field current and thus the motor flux does not increase linearly. For this reason the field current cannot be directly used to define FLUX inside the motor. On the other hand the motor armature voltage without load (=EMF) is directly proportional to the motor flux and motor speed below field weakening area. E.g. if motor nominal DC voltage is 440V and the motor is run using half speed and full FLUX, then the DC voltage is about 220V. Then if the flux is reduced by 50% and while keeping the same speed, the DC voltage is about 110V. (Example !). Since the motor EMF-voltage is directly proportional to motor FLUX it is possible to define relationship between field current and motor FLUX by means of measuring motor armature voltage without load (EMF). The main idea of linearisation is to find such field current which produces desired EMF-voltage at a certain speed. The linearisation is done by means of a function block provided with 3 defined values: • 90% field current • 70% field current • 40% field current The intermediate values are interpolated. During commissioning the 3 aforementioned must be programmed, if the EMF-controller is desired to use.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-11
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter FunctionsAn example of the linearisation procedure There are various ways to define the needed values for the field current linearisation. The following procedure is given as example to explain the linearisation. 1. Select Field Control Mode (FIELD CONTRL MODE, 15.06) = EMF control without field reversal (1: EMF) Set EMF-controllers output limits to zero (46.01 POS LIM EMF CON) (46.02 NEG LIM EMF CON) Set 41.19 INT EMF REF = 100 % 2. Run the motor to half speed. Read EMF VOLT ACT (signal 1.9) e.g. measured value is 220V 3. Reduce 41.19 INT EMF REF until EMF VOLT ACT (1.9) reaches 90 % of the 1st measurement. Read the value REL FIELD CUR M1 (2.26) and write it to parameter FLD CUR @90% FLUX (41.16) 4. Reduce 41.19 INT EMF REF until EMF VOLT ACT reaches 70 % of the 1st measurement. Read the value REL FIELD CUR M1 (2.26) and write it to parameter FLD CUR @70% FLUX (41.15) 5. Reduce 41.19 INT EMF REF until EMF VOLT ACT reaches 40 % of the 1st measurement. Read the value REL FIELD CUR M1 (2.26) and write it to parameter FLD CUR @40% FLUX (41.14)6-12 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.5 EMF - Controller The EMF - controller main control function: • When running the motor above nominal speed, the EMF-controller reduces motor field in order to keep the EMF-voltage constant at maximum level. This prevents armature over voltage and ensures the maximum possible flux.6.5.1 Selection of EMF - controller The EMF-control function can be activated by means of parameter FIELD CONTRL MODE (15.06). 0 FIX no EMF-control 4Q 1 EMF EMF-control, no field reversal 4Q 2 FIX/REV Field reversal, no EMF-control 1Q 3 EMF/REV Field rev. + EMF-control 1Q 4 FIX/OPTI/REV Field rev. + OPTITORQUE, no EMF-control 1Q 5 EMF/OPTI/REV Fieldrev. + EMF-control + OPTITORQUE, no EMF-control 1Q 6 FIX/OPTI OPTITORQUE, no field rev. 4Q 7 EMF/OPTI EMF-control + OPTITORQUE, no field rev. 4Q Field reversal is normally used for 1-quadrant drive type. The type of the field exciter must also be such that field current can be controlled, like with SDCS-FEX-2 or DCF503/504.6.5.2 Field weakening area Above the motor’s nominal speed the motor flux is to be reduced in order to avoid armature over voltage. This area is called "field weakening area", and the speed at which the field reduction starts, is called "field weakening point". Above field weakening point the motor FLUX is reduced. Three parameters are needed to define the function: SPEED SCALING RPM (69.1) Max. speed of the drive in rpm. This rpm value equals to integer speed value 20000. NOTE: Must be set in the range of 87%…500% of the motor nominal speed (99.08). Otherwise an alarm (SPEED SCALE) is generated. MOTOR NOM SPEED (99.08) The motor field weakening point. Integer scaling: 20000 = maximum speed (as defined with parameter 69.1) INT EMF REF (41.19) Nominal internal EMF reference, in percent of nominal AC supply voltage (as defined with parameter 42.6).DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-13
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.6 ANALOG AND DIGITAL I/O6.6.1 I/O-Board Configuration The parameter IO BOARD CONFIG [98.08] selects the IO boards connected to the SDCS-CON2 board. The SDCS-IOB2 and SDCS-IOB3 boards do not extend the amount of available I/O resources, but change their electrical behaviour. 0: NO I/O BOARD 1: IOB2 2: IOB3 3: IOB2+3: SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3 The SDCS-IOE board extends the amount of available DI resources. 4: IOE: SDCS-IOE 5: IOE+IOB2: SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB2 6: IOE+IOB3: SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB3 7: IOE+IOB2+3: SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3 This parameter configures the I/O board supervision. A selected board must be present, a present board must be selected. Otherwise a fault ”44 NO I/O” is generated. The configuration of the available DI resources is done by means of parameters inside the Digital inputs, group 10.6.6.2 Digital Inputs The digital inputs consist of 8 connections. With the I/O extension board SDCS-IOE- 1, 7 additional inputs are available. All the connections of the 8 standard inputs are on the SDCS-IOB-2 board (or SDCS-CON-2, if SDCS-IOB-2 is not used). The digital inputs are isolated and filtered. The time constant for filters can be selected. Input voltage levels are 24 V dc...48 V DC, 115 V AC or 230 V AC depending on the hardware of the board. Digital inputs DI1-DI8 are used for several purposes, like for example: • acknowledge of main contactor, DI3 • acknowledge of converter fan, DI1 • acknowledge of external fan, DI2 (enabled with par. 15.7) • electrical disconnect, DI4 • motor temperature protection(Klixon), par. 28.18 • external fault, par. 30.3 • mechanical brake acknowledge, par. 10.1 • joystick and limit switches, par. Group 10 See appendix B for more details.6-14 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.6.3 Analogue Inputs AN IN TACHO VALUE 1.26 13.04 Analogue tacho response AN IN TACH HI VAL AN IN TACH LO VAL 13.05 (SPEED FB SEL par. 50.3) AN IN 1 VALUE SPEED REF SCALE AI1 13.01 1.18 AN IN 2 VALUE TORQUE REF SCALE AI2 13.02 (or Motor1 Temp (par.28.09) 1.19 possible if Torque ref not used, i.e. par. 13.02=0) AN IN 3 VALUE SPEED CORRECTION REF 2.20 SCALE AI3 13.03 (or Motor2 Temp (par. 28.12) possible if Speed corr not used i.e. par. 13.03=0) AN IN 4 VALUE EARTH FAULT MONITORING EARTH CUR FLT SEL (28.19) dcs600docufig_24.dsf Figur 6-6 Structure of DCS600 MultiDrive’s analogue inputs. 4 analogue input channels are available. All connections are on the SDCS-IOB-3 board (or SDCS-CON-2, if SDCS-IOB-2 is not used). All four channels of IOB-3 can be scaled according to the needs of the applications. Resolution of channels 1...2 is 12 bits +sign and channels 3...4 11 bits +sign. SDCS-IOB-3: • input range: -10V…+10 V, 0/4 mA…20 mA (AI1, AI2, AI3) • -1 V...+1 V (AI2 and AI3 only) • The input range is selected by jumpers of the board, see figure below • all analogue inputs are galvanically isolated • current generator for PT100 (5 mA) and PTC (1,5 mA) elements • Earth fault monitor input Analogue inputs can be used for following internal applications: • speed measurement if SPEED FB SEL (50.03) = ANALOG TAC • temperature measurement(s) of the motor(s) (see part 6.12 Motor protection). • Earth fault monitoring (see part 6.10 Earth fault monitoring).DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-15
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions Gain=1 Gain=10 Earth fault SDCS-IOB-3 Ch Switch Input range: Input range: 0/4...20 mA -10V..+10V Input range: measuring -1V..+1V selected 1 A1 B1 2 8 AITAC S1:1-2 X3 S2 1 26 7 pin X1 AI1 S1:3-4 S3 1 2 8 A1 B1 AI2 S1:5-6 12 7 1 2 S2:1-2 1 2 1 2 S1 S2:3-4 1 2 13 14 X2 3 4 3 4 3 4 26 5 6 5 6 5 6 1 pin S2:5-6 7 8 R110 S2:7-8 7 8 7 8 31 X4 S5 4 2 AI3 S1:7-8 S3:1-2 1 2 1 2 1 2 2 12 1 3 S3:3-4 3 4 3 4 3 4 S10 5 6 5 6 5 6 1 22 24 V17 S3:5-6 7 8 23 7 8 7 8 S3:7-8 X5 S41 11 T1 AI4 S1:9-10 12 2 S1:11-12 10 S1:13-14 AI4 S1:9-10 S1:11-12 S1:13-14 dcs600docufig_25.ds4 Figur 6-7 Jumper coding of the analogue inputs. Current source settings for PT100 and PTC elements are following: S5: 1-2 closed S5:3-4 open 1,5 mA (PTC) S5: 1-2 open S5:3-4 closed 5 mA (PT100)6-16 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.6.4 Analogue Outputs Three (3) analogue output channels are available. All connections are at the SDCS- IOB-3-board (or SDCS-CON-2, if SDCS-IOB-2 is not used). The first two outputs are programmable. The range of outputs is +10V...-10V, while the resolution is 11 bits + sign. The third output is fixed and used for indication of armature actual current directly from HW measurement. The basic scaling of the output is: 3V equals to the converter’s nominal current. The gain can be adjusted by means of potentiometer R110 in the SDCS-IOB-3 board. AN 0UT 1 INDEX SDCB- IOB- 1 14.04 IN O ADD2 HL AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT SCALE X 1:1 6,17 14.01 MUL AN OUT 1 NOM VAL LL 10000 HL=+10V X 1:18 ,17 14.03 DIV -10000 LL=-10V ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT X1 :19,20 14.02 SDCS- IOB- 3 AN 0UT 1 INDEX 14.04 IN X 4:1,2 O HL SCALE ADD2 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT 14.01 MUL X 4:3,4 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL LL 10000 HL=+10V X4:5,6 14.03 DIV -10000 LL=-10V ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT 14.02 ARM CUR ACT FILT 1.18 HL LL 4095 HL=+10V 0 LL=0V dcs_600docufig_26.ds4 Figur 6-8 Structure of the analogue outputs.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-17
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions The signal selections for analogue outputs are made by the parameters AN OUT 1 INDEX (14.9) 0 = overriding control system commands the channel AN OUT 2 INDEX (14.13) <>0 = signal group and index The output is scaled by the parameters AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT (14.6) Output voltage in mV when the connected signal equals to the value given by parameter (14.08)Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV AN OUT 1 NOM VAL (14.8) Nominal value of the connected signal AN OUT 2 NOM VOLT (14.05) Output voltage in mV when the connected signal equals to the value given by parameter (14.12) Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV AN OUT 2 NOM VAL (14.12) Nominal value of the connected signal An offset voltage can be set by the parameters ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT (14.07) Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV. ANOUT 2 OFFS VOLT (14.11 Integer scaling: 1 = 1mV.6.6.5 I/O-Extention Board The I/O extension board SDCS-IOE-1 provides additional 7 digital inputs, see Appendix B for more details. NOTE: Additional analog inputs are not used in DCC 600 (therefor jumpers S1-S4 and terminal X2 are not used). SDCS-IOE-1 X17 H1 H2 H3 H4 H5 H6 H7 DI9 DI10 DI11 DI12 DI13 DI14 DI15 1 2 1 21 2 1 2 3 43 4 7 8 3 4 S1* S2 * S3 * S4 * X2 X1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 dcs_600docufig_43.ds4 Figur 6-9 SDCS-IOE-1 and its jumper settings.6-18 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.7 DC-Breaker (Option) The DC-breaker is used to protect the motor from overcurrent or, in case of mains under voltage, the generator bridge from blowing up. OVERCURRENT 3.03 / B1 MONO1 TRIP_DC_BREAKER OR2 I O >1 6.05 / B1 - 1s TP TE MAINS UNDERVOLTAGE 3.03 / B1 1 dcs_600docufig_28.ds4 Figur 6-10 Control of the DC-breaker. The program produces the signal TRIP_DC_BREAKER (bit 1 of CON2 BITS (6.05)) immediately after overcurrent or mains under voltage has been detected. If a DO- channel is assigned to this signal, the DO-channel is updated as fast as possible (immediately after detecting the tripping situation).6.8 Shared motion If one converter controls two motors, the connections for motors are made with external contactors. Both motors have still their own field exciters. The field exciter called "first field exciter" is controlled normally. Another field exciter for the motor 2 is controlled only by using constant field current reference. This function is used e.g. in the crane application where one motor is used for lift the load with adjustable field and the other motor is used e.g. moving the whole crane. Only one motor is driven simultaneously. DCS600 MultiDrive Converter I/O- Boards C O N TR O L B O A R D SCDS-CON-2 F IR S T F IE L D E X C IT E R SECOND FIELD EXCITER - DCF503/504 - DCF503/504 X16 RS-485 RS-485 X14 RS-485 X14 F IR S T F IE L D E X C IT E R X2:4 Address of RS485 X2:5 for second unit Control C o n tr o l Control SDCS-FEX-2 M M FIELD FIELD dcs_600docufig_30.ds4 MOTOR 1 MOTOR 2 Figur 6-11 Principle of shared motion.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-19
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions The type of the first field exciter can be either SDCS-FEX-2 or DCF503/504.The second unit must be DCF503/504. For the second unit the address of the RS485 serial link is set for: DCF503/504: by the hardware jumper in the DCF503/504 terminal blocks6.9 Power loss monitoring and auto-reclosing The Auto-Reclosing function allows to continue drive operation immediately after a short mains failure without any additional functions of the overriding control system. In order to keep the overriding control system and the drive control electronics running through the short network dip, a UPS is always needed for 220 V AC auxiliary voltage. Without the UPS all DI-signals like emergency stop, faulty start inhibition (OFFx), acknowledge signals etc. would have false states although the system itself would stay alive. The Auto-Reclosing function defines whether the drive is tripped immediately by mains under-voltage or if the drive will continue running after the mains voltage returns.6.9.1 Short Power Loss The supervision of main supply under voltage has two limits, U NET MIN 1 (40.01) alarm level U NET MIN 2 (40.02) tripping level. If the mains voltage falls below the U NET MIN 1 (40.01) limit but stays above the U NET MIN 2 (40.02) limit, the following actions take place: • Firing angle is set to max. • Half pulses are applied in order to extinguish the current as fast as possible • The alarm “18 MAIN UVLT” is generated. • During net failure the speed ramp output is updated from the measured MOTOR SPEED (1.01). • the output of the EMF-controller is frozen. If the mains voltage returns before the time defined by parameter POWER DOWN TIME (40.03) and the overriding control system keeps the commands "ON" and "RUN" = 1, the drive will start after 2 seconds. Otherwise the drive trips after this power down time has elapsed (fault “29 MAIN UVLT”) When the mains voltage drops below the limit U NET MIN 2 (40.02) , the action is selected by means of the parameter6-20 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions PWRLOSS TRIP (15.04) 0 IMMEDIAT the drive will trip immediately to the fault: "29 MAIN UVLT". 1 DELAYED The drive starts automatically if possible (see U NET MIN 1 above). Below the limit U NET MIN 2 the field acknowledge signals are ignored. If UPS is not available, PWRLOSS TRIP (15.04) should be set to 0 (IMMEDIAT, the drive will trip to the mains under voltage fault) to avoid secondary phenomena due to missing power for DIs or AIs.6.10 Earth fault monitoring The earth fault indication is based on a sum current transformer T1 in the AC-side of the converter. The secondary side can be connected to the analogue input channel AI4 of the SDCS-IOB-3-board (By use of strapping S1, see Figure 6-8). The sum current of three phases has to be zero, otherwise an earth fault is detected. The earth fault protection is activated by means of the parameter: EARTH CUR FLT SEL (28.19) 0 NOT USED (default value) 1 ACTIVATED The earth fault current tripping level is set in Amps to the parameter: EARTH CUR FLT LIM (28.20) 4= default = 4A The delay before tripping is set in 0.001 s to the parameter: EARTH CUR FLT DEL (28.21), 10 = default = 10 ms The earth vurrent signal connected to analogue input AI4 must be scaled as 1V==4A.6.11 Monitoring functions6.11.1 Speed Measurement Supervision The supervision of the speed measurement is based on the relation between the measured speed and measured/calculated EMF.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-21
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions MOTOR SPEED 1.01 COMP-I I1>I2 I1 I1=I2 SPEED MEAS MON LEV 28.23 I2 I1<I2 AND2 & COMP-I I1 I1>I2 MUL I2 I1=I2 X SR SPEED_MEAS_FAULT -1 I1<I2 OR2 S Q >1 - 3.04 / B5 R COMP-I FIELD1_REV_ACK I1 SW-C1 I1>I2 ACT I2 6.05 / B15 I1=I2 -1 I1<I2 +1 RESET EMF VOLT ACT MUL I1 COMP-I X AND2 I2 I1>I2 1.09 & I1=I2 SPEED EMF MON LEV 28.24 I1<I2 MUL X dcs_600docufig_33.ds4 -1 Figur 6-12 Speed measurement supervision. Above a certain EMF-voltage the measured speed must also be above zero and the sign of the speed measurement must be correct. Otherwise the fault "14 SPD_MEAS " will be generated. The level of EMF-voltage the supervision is activated at is set by the parameter SPEED EMF MON LEV (28.24) default: 50V The speed monitoring trips, if the measured speed drops below the value programmed to the parameter SPEED MEAS MON LEV (28.23). default: 15rpm6.12 Motor protection6.12.1 Measured Motor Temperature Two motor temperatures can be measured at the same time. Both measurements have an alarm limit and a tripping limit. The limits are programmable. The temperature measurements use AI-channels AI2 and AI3. NOTE: “AI2-temp” cannot be used in Standalone mode (parameter 64.1=True) if Torque ref. is used (if not used set par. 13.2 = 0). "AI3-temp" only possible to use if "Speed Corr" not used, i.e. if par. 13.3 = 0 . the SDCS-IOB-3-board features a selectable current generator for • PT100 (5 mA) or • PTC (1.5 mA)-elements. The unit of the measurement depends on the selected measurement mode. For PT100 the unit is Celsius. For PTC the unit is Ω. Measurement selection Max. 3 PT100 elements can be connected in serial. In case of only one PT100 element the AI-channel measurement range must be configured by hardware jumpers to the voltage range 0...1V.6-22 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions The measurements are configured by the parameters: MOT 1 TEMP SEL (28.09) For analogue input 2 MOT 2 TEMP SEL (28.12) For analogue input 3 0 NOT USED (default value) 1 1 PT100 [°C], 5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+1 V 2 2 PT100 [°C], 5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+10 V 3 3 PT100 [°C], 5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+10 V 4 PTC [Ω], 1.5 mA current generator, voltage range 0..+10 V Alarm and tripping limits In case of over temperature the main and the field contactors will be opened but fans are kept running until the temperature falls short of the alarm limit. For the PT100-measurement alarm and tripping limits are set directly as Celsius- degrees. In the case of thermistor measurement (PTC) limits are set as resistance values. (0...4000 ohms). Alarm levels are set by the parameters: ALARM LIM M1 TEMP (28.10), analogue input 2 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP (28.13), analogue input 3 Tripping limits are set by the parameters: FAULT LIM M1 TEMP (28.11), analogue input 2 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP (28.14), analogue input 3 When a certain limit is set to zero then the according function is by-passed.6.12.2 Motor Thermal Model General In DCS600 MultiDrive there are two thermal models that can be used at the same time. Two models at the same time are needed in case of one converter is shared to two motors, e.g. shared motion drive sections. By means of one signal the measured armature current is directed to the desired model. In normal case only one thermal model is needed. The thermal model of the motor is recommended to use if a direct motor temperature measurement isn’t available and the current limits of the drive are set higher than the motor nominal current. The thermal model does not directly calculate the temperature of the motor. The thermal model calculates the Temperature rise of the motor based on the fact thatDCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-23
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions when starting to run the cold motor with nominal current the motor will reach the end temperature after the specified time. This time is about four times the motor thermal time constant. The temperature rise of the motor behaves like the time constant which is proportional to the motor current power of two. Iact2 Φ=  * ( 1 - e -t/τ ) * 100 (1) Iref2 where Φ temperature rise Iact motor current Iref reference current, Normally rated current of motor. τ temperature time constant. 100 scaling factor When the motor is cooling down, the temperature model follows next formula Iact2 Φ=  * e -t/τ ) * 100 (2) Iref2 As from the formulas (1) and (2) can be seen, the temperature model uses the same time constant when motor is heating or cooling down. Thermal model selection The activation of thermal models is made by the parameter THERM MODEL SEL (15.03) 0 NONE no thermal model (default) 1 MOTOR 1 thermal model of motor 1 2 MOTOR 2 thermal model of motor 2 3 MOTOR 1 + 2 thermal model of both motors If both thermal models are activated, the overriding control system can select by means of the signal USER MACRO CHANGE (e.g. with Command word, DS1.1:14) 0 MOTOR 1 1 MOTOR 2 which thermal model follows the armature current measurement. The input value for the not selected one is always zero. So one thermal model follows armature current while the other is "cooling down". If the thermal model is not activated, its output is forced to zero.6-24 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions Alarm and tripping limits Alarm and tripping limit calculations use as a base current (Iref) a value given by the parameters TEMP MODEL 1 CUR (28.02) TEMP MODEL 2 CUR (28.06) The normal value is 100% (integer:4096) (≅ motor rated current). This value should not normally be changed. If, for some reason, it is not possible to run the motor continuously with it’s rated current, e.g. due to poor cooling environment, that value can be decreased. E.g. the desired continuous load is 85% of the used motor rated current. The value for parameters are then 85% (integer: 0.85 * 4096 = 3481). Alarm and tripping limits are selected by means of four parameters ALARM LIM LOAD I1 (28.03) Integer scaling: TRIP LIM LOAD I1 (28.04) 1 == 1 % of nominal load ALARM LIM LOAD I2 (28.07) -"- TRIP LIM LOAD I2 (28.08) -"- The default values are selected in order to achieve quite high overload ability. E.g. the current must continuously be √120 * 100 = 109.5% before alarming, while for tripping the current must be √130 * 100 = 114%. Recommended value for alarming is 102% and for tripping 106% (of nominal motor current) which means the following settings on parameters: recommended value for alarm 104 % (100 * 1.022) recommended value for trip 112 % (100 * 1.062) Thermal time constant The time constants for both thermal models are set by two parameters TEMP MODEL 1 TC (28.01) Integer scaling: TEMP MODEL 2 TC (28.05) 1 == 1 sec One has to take into account that the thermal time constant cannot be used directly when calculating the tripping time. In many cases the motor manufacturer provides a curve that defines how long the motor can be overloaded by a certain overload factor. In this case the proper thermal time constant must be calculated. Example: The drive is desired to trip if the motor current exceeds 170% of the motor nominal current for more than 1 minute. Selected tripping base level is 106%. TRIP LIM LOAD I1 (28.04) = 112%.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-25
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions Current Id/ % 260 240 200 180 160 140 120 100 0.5 1.0 5.0 10 100 Time (min) dcs_600docufig_34.ds4 Figur 6-13 Motor load curve. Note: this is an example and does not necessarily correspond to any motor ! Using formula (1) we can calculate a correct value for τ: Formula: 1.72 * ( 1 - e -1/τ ) = 1.12 (3) Solving the equation concerning τ : 2.89 - 2.89 * e -1/τ = 1.12 (4) 1.77 / 2.89 = e -1/τ (5) ln 1.77 / 2.89 = - 1/τ (6) τ = 1 / 0.49 (7) τ = 2.04 min Select TEMP MODEL1(2) TC = (60 * 2.04) sec = 122 sec6.12.3 Klixon The temperature of the motor can also be supervised by means of a Klixon.The Klixon is a thermal switch opening it’s contact at a defined temperature. This can be used for supervision of the temperature by connecting the switch to a digital input of the DCS600. The digital inputs for the Klixon(s) are selected by the parameter MOT1 KLIXONSEL (28.18) Select DI for motor 1 MOT1 KLIXONSEL (28.25) Select DI for motor 26-26 DCS 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 6 − DC Converter Functions6.12.4 Armature Overvoltage The setting of the armature overvoltage limit is based on the nominal supply voltage value (=par. 42.6). The limit is set into the parameter ARMAT OVERVOLT LEV (28.22) Setting 100 % means equal to the setting of parameter 42.6 (=NOM SUPPLY VOLT): Exceeding this limit causes the fault "28 ARM_OVOLT".DCC 600 Firmware Manual 6-27
    • 7 Chapter 7 - Par ameters7.1 Overview This chapter explains the function of, and valid selections for, each DCC 600 parameter.7.2 Parameter Groups The DCC 600 parameters are arranged into groups by their function. Figure 7-1 illustrates the organisation of the parameter groups. Chapter 2 – Overview of DCC 600 Programming explains how to select and set the parameters. Refer to Chapter 3 – Start-up Data and Chapter 4 – Control Operations for more information on the Start-up Data and Actual Signals. Some parameters that are not in use in the current application are hidden to simplify programming. CAUTION! Exercise caution when configuring I/O connections as it is possible to use one I/O connection to control several operations. If an I/O is programmed for some purpose the setting remains, even if you select the I/O for another purpose with another parameter. 46 EMF CONTROL 44 FIELD EXCITATION DCC 600 43 CURRENT CONTROL 42 MEASUREMENT PARAMETER 41 MOTOR NOM VAL 92 DATASET TR ADR GROUPS 40 UNDERVOLT MONIT 98 OPTION MODULES 99 START-UP DATA DC CONTROLLERS START-UP DATA 80 SHARED MOTION 72 MASTER/FOLLOWER 71 FIELD BUS COMM. 70 POSITION MEASUREM. 69 REFERENCE HANDLER 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 68 POWER OPTIMIZATION 28 MOTOR PROTECTION 67 MECH.BRAKE CONTROL 24 TORQUE CTRL 66 TORQUE PROVING 23 SPEED CTRL 65 LOGIC HANDLER 20 LIMITS 64 CRANE 63 FAST STOP 62 TORQUE MONITOR 61 SPEED MONITOR 60 LOCAL OPERATION DRIVE 17 TEST GEN PAR 16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS 15 DRIVE LOGIC 14 I/O OUTPUTS CRANE MODULE GROUPS 13 ANALOG INPUT 51 COMM MODULE 10 DIGITAL INPUTS 50 PULSE ENCODER CONTROL CONNECTIONS OPTION MODULES Figure 7-1 Parameter GroupsDCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-1
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.1 Group 10 Digital Inputs These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running, The Range/Unit column in Table 7-1 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-1 Group 10. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 BRAKE ACKN SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6; Brake acknowledge DI7;DI8 digital input 2 ZERO POS SEL NOT USED; DI2, DI6; Zero position digital EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 input (Stand alone) 3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL See parameter 10.2 Slowdown digital input (Stand alone) 4 FAST STOP-N SEL See parameter 10.2 Fast stop digital input (Stand alone) 6 SYNC SEL. NOT USED; DI2; DI6, Synchronisation digital DI7; DI8; EXT DI9 … input EXT DI15 8 STEP REF2 SEL See parameter 10. 2 Step reference 2 digital input (Stand alone) 9 STEP REF3 SEL See parameter 10. 2 Step reference 3 digital input (Stand alone) 10 STEP REF4 SEL See parameter 10. 2 Step reference 4 digital input (Stand alone) 11 HIGH SPEED SEL See parameter 10. 2 High speed digital input (Stand alone) 12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL See parameter 10.1 Snag load digital input 13 ACCELERATE SEL See parameter 10. 2 Accelerate digital input (Stand alone) 1 BRAKE ACKN SEL Selection of digital input for signal BRAKE ACKN NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 2 ZERO POS SEL Selection of digital input for signal ZERO POS, used in Stand alone mode. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL Selection of digital input for signal SLOWDOWN-N, used in Stand alone mode. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI157-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 4 FAST STOP-N SEL Selection of digital input for signal FAST STOP-N, used in Stand alone mode. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 6 SYNC SEL Selection of digital input for signal SYNC, used to make Hw synchronisation of position counter. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 8 STEP REF 2 SEL Selection of digital input for signal STEP REF 2, used in Stand alone mode, with Step Joystick or Step Radio control. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 9 STEP REF 3 SEL Selection of digital input for signal STEP REF 3, used in Stand alone mode, with Step Joystick or Step Radio control. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 10 STEP REF 4 SEL Selection of digital input for signal STEP REF 4, used in Stand alone mode, with Step Joystick or Step Radio control. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 11 HIGH SPEED SEL Selection of digital input for signal HIGH SPEED, used in Stand alone mode, to enable Power optimising speed ref. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL Selection of digital input for signal SNAG LOAD-N, used in Fieldbus mode to activate Fast stop 2 during hoisting only, with speed > 1 %. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 13 ACCELERATE SEL Selection of digital input for signal ACCELERATE, used in Stand alone mode, with Motor Pot control. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-3
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.2 Group 13 Analogue Inputs These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running, The Range/Unit column in Table 7-2 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. NOTE: Updating interval for AI1 and AI2 is 40 ms, and for AI3 (Speed correction) the updating interval is 10 ms. Table 7-2 Group 13. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 SCALE AI1 0.000 … 10.000 Scaling factor for AI1 2 SCALE AI2 0.000 … 10.000 Scaling factor for AI2 3 SCALE AI3 0.000 … 10.000 Scaling factor for AI3 4 AN IN TACH HI VAL -32767 … 32767 Value corresponding to the maximum input of the analogue tacho input 5 AN IN TACH LO VAL -32767 … 32767 Value corresponding to the minimum input of the analogue tacho input 1 SCALE AI1 Scaling factor for analogue input AI1 signal. 2 SCALE AI2 Scaling factor for analogue input AI2 signal. 3 SCALE AI3 Scaling factor for analogue input AI3 signal. 4 AN IN TACH HI VAL Value corresponding to the maximum input of the analogue tacho input. 20.000 equals 100 % speed (see parameter 69.1). 5 AN IN TACH LO VAL Value corresponding to the maximum input of the analogue tacho input. 20.000 equals 100 % speed (see parameter 69.1).7-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.3 Group 14 I/O Outputs These parameter values can only be altered when the DCC 600 is stopped. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-3 belowshows the allowable parameter values. The text following below explains the parameters in detail. NOTE: Updating interval for Relay outputs is 40 ms. Table 7-3 Group 14. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 DO4 OUTPUT Refer to text below. 2 DO5 OUTPUT Refer to text below. 3 DO6 OUTPUT Refer to text below. 4 DO7 OUTPUT Refer to text below. 5 DO8 OUTPUT Refer to text below. 6 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT 0 … 10 000 mV Analogue output 1 voltage at nominal value 7 ANOUT 1 OFFS -10 000 … 10 000 mV Offset voltage to VOLT analogue output 1 8 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL -32768 .. 32767 Nominal value of signal at analogue output 1 9 AN OUT 1 INDEX 0 … 19999 Index of the signal connected to analogue output 1 10 AN OUT 2 NOM 0 … 10 000 mV Analogue output 2 VOLT voltage at nominal value 11 ANOUT 2 OFFS -10 000 … 10 000 mV Offset voltage to VOLT analogue output 2 12 AN OUT 2 NOM VAL -32768 … 32767 Nominal value of signal at analogue output 2 13 AN OUT 2 INDEX 0 … 19999 Index of the signal connected to analogue output 2 1 DO4 OUTPUT This parameter allows you to select which information is indicated with digital output 4. NOT USED READY The DCC 600 is ready for ON-order. The relay is not energised if: the “Electrical disconnect” input, e.g. DI4, is open or a fault exists. RUNNING The DCC 600 has been started with speed and torque controllers active. FAULT A fault has occurred. Refer to Chapter 8– Fault Tracing for more details. FAULT-N Relay energised when power is applied, and de-energised upon a fault trip.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-5
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters CONTROL LOC Control location. Indication if External or Local control mode is selected from panel. CONTROL LOC = False indicates Local control mode (panel control). BRAKE LIFT Signal for controlling the mechanical brake. WATCHDOG-N Indicates: Communication supervision (MAS OSC FLT), External fault (EXT FAULT) and Brake long falltime (BRAKE LONG FTIME) of the brake. Also indicating if CPU Stalls out. This signal should be used to give Emergency Stop to crane drive. NOTE: Communication supervision only available in Fieldbus mode. USER 1 OR 2 Indicates if User Macro 1 is loaded (=0), or if User Macro 2 is loaded (=1). REVERSE Indicates if motor speed is negative. MOT OVERSP Fault signal indication for motor overspeed trip (level set with parameter 61.3) RDY FOR RUN Indicates that fan, field and main contactors are on and drive ready for a start order. 2 DO5 OUTPUT Refer to Parameter 14.1 DO4 OUTPUT. 3 DO6 OUTPUT Refer to Parameter 14.1 DO4 OUTPUT. 4 DO7 OUTPUT Refer to Parameter 14.1 DO4 OUTPUT. 5 DO8 OUTPUT Refer to Parameter 14.1 DO4 OUTPUT. 6 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT Analogue output 1 voltage at nominal value. 7 ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT Offset voltage of analogue output 1. 8 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL Nominal value of signal at analogue output 1. 9 AN OUT 1 INDEX Index of the signal connected to analogue output 1. Example: 204 means Group 2 signal 04; speed error neg.10 AN OUT 2 NOM VOLT Analogue output 2 voltage at nominal value.11 ANOUT 2 OFFS VOLT Offset voltage of analogue output 2.7-6 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 12 AN OUT 2 NOM VAL Nominal value of signal at analogue output 2. 13 AN OUT 2 INDEX Index of the signal connected to analogue output 2. Example: 204 means Group 2 signal 04; speed error neg.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-7
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.4 Group 15 Drive Logic These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-4 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. NOTE: Updating interval for Analogue outputs is 40 ms. Table 7-4 Group 15. Parameter Range/Unit Description 2 DRIVE MODE 0 … 22 DRIVE MODE SELECTOR 3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE; MOTOR THERMAL MODEL 1; MOTOR 2; SELECTOR MOTOR 1 + 2 4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT; POWER LOSS TRIP DELAYED 5 USED FEX TYPE 0 … 13 SELECTION FOR USED FIELD EXCITER TYPE 6 FIELD CONTRL MODE FIX; EMF; FIELD CONTROL FIX/REV; OPERATING MODE EMF/REV; FIX/OPTI/REV; EMF/OPTI/REV; FIX/OPTI; EMF/OPTI 7 EXT FAN ACK MODE TRIP; ALARM; EXTERNAL FAN NO SUPERVIS ACKNOWLEDGE MODE 10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED; FIELD HEATING ENABLED SELECTOR ALWAYS 11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE; FIELD HEATING FOR ENABLE MOTOR 1 12 FLD HEAT 2 SEL DISABLE; FIELD HEATING FOR ENABLE MOTOR 2 17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms MAIN SUPPLY OFF DELAY 18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED; DI1 DC-BREAKER´S … DI8 ACKNOWLEDGE INPUT SELECTION 19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms DC BREAKER OFF DELAY7-8 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 2 DRIVE MODE Drive mode selector for several auto- and manual tuning procedures as well as for the thyristor diagnosis. After autotuning of the armature or field current controller, or after the thyristor diagnosis, drive mode is reset to 0. If error(s) occur during the selected procedure, drive mode is set to –1. The reason of the error can be seen from the signal Commissioning status (6.02). 0: Normal mode 1: Reserved 2: Reserved 3: Autotuning of the armature current controller 4: Manual tuning of the armature current controller 5: Autotuning of the 1st field exciter’s current controller 6: Reserved 7: Manual tuning of the 1st field exciter 8: Manual tuning of the 2nd field exciter 9: Manual tuning of the speed controller 10. Reserved 11: Manual tuning of the EMF controller 12: Reserved 13: Thyristor diagnosis 20: Reserved 21: Reserved 22: Save the type code parameters of the converter to the SDCS- CON-2 board’s internal FLASH memory. This has to be done after changing the SDCS-CON-2 board or after changing the physical type of the converter. 3 THERM MODEL SEL Thermal model selector: NONE MOTOR 1: activates thermal model of motor 1. MOTOR 2: activates thermal model of motor 2. MOTOR 1 + 2: activates thermal model of both motorsDCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-9
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 4 PWRLOSS TRIP The action taken, when the mains voltage drops below the limit defined by parameter u net min 2 (40.02) IMMEDIAT: The drive is tripped immediately. DELAYED: The drive is tripped if the mains voltage doesn’t return within the time defined by parameter pwr down time (40.03). 5 USED FEX TYPE Selection for used field exciter type 0: No field exciter ABB field exciter, control via serial communication (FEX) link 1: internal diode field exciter SDCS-FEX-1 2: Internal SDCS-FEX-2 or external DCF503/504 3: External DCF503/504 as second field exciter 4: Internal SDCS-FEX-2 or external DCF503/504 as first field exciter and external DCF503/504 as second field exciter. External field exciter, control via AI/DI (alien field exciters) 5: External field exciter, acknowledge through DI4 6: External field exciter, acknowledge through DI6 7: External field exciter, acknowledge through DI7 8: External field exciter, acknowledge through DI8 9: External field exciter, acknowledge through AITAC 10: External field exciter, acknowledge through AI1 11: External field exciter, acknowledge through AI2 12: External field exciter, acknowledge through AI3 13: External field exciter, acknowledge through AI4 DCF503/504: check 1st/second field exciter jumper from HW- documentation.6 FIELD CONTRL MODE Field control operating mode for field exciter no.1 (Motor 1). FIX: no EMF-control (constant field) no field reversal EMF: EMF-control no field reversal FIX/REV: no EMF-control (constant field) field reversal7-10 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters EMF/REV: EMF-control field reversal FIX/OPTI/REV: no EMF-control (constant field) OPTITORQUE, field reversal EMF/OPTI/REV: EMF-control OPTITORQUE, field reversal FIX/OPTI: no EMF-control (constant field) OPTITORQUE, no field reversal EMF/OPTI: EMF-control OPTITORQUE, no field reversal 7 EXT FAN ACK MODE The action taken, if the external fan acknowledge is not “ON” within 3 sec after the “ON”-command TRIP: drive is tripped ALARM: only alarm NO SUPERVIS: no supervision 10 FIELD HEAT SEL Enable field heating after opening the main contactor. After 10 sec “OFF”-time the field reference is reduced. DISABLED: disable field heating ENABLED: enable field heating ALWAYS: field is heated, even when the “ON” command is 0 11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL Enable field heating for motor 1 after “START”=0 and “RDYRUN”=1. After 10 sec “START=0”-time the field reference is reduced. DISABLE: disable field heating ENABLE: enable field heating 12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL Enable field heating for motor 2 after “START”=0 and “RDYRUN”=1. After 10 sec “START=0”-time the field reference is reduced. DISABLE: disable field heating ENABLE: enable field heating17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL Delay of switching off the main supply (command “main supply OFF”) after electrical disconnection or overcurrent. 18 DC BREAK ACK SEL Selection of DI channel for the DC-breaker’s (active low) acknowledge signal. 19 DC BREAK OFF DEL Delay of opening the DC breaker after starting the dynamic braking.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-11
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.5 Group 16 System Ctr Inputs These parameter values can only be altered with the DCC 600 stopped. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-5 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-5 Group 16 Parameter Range/Unit Description 2 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN; Parameter lock input. LOCKED 3 PASS CODE 0 ... 30 000 Parameter lock pass code. 4 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL; DI2, Fault reset input DI6, DI7; DI8 selector. 5 USER MACRO CH NOT SEL; DI2; Restores parameters to SRCE DI6; DI7;DI8; user macro setting EXT DI9; EXT values. DI10; COMM MODULE 6 SHARED MOTION OFF; ON; Shared motion SEL FORCE MOT 2 selection, or “force parameters to motor 2 values” 2 PARAMETER LOCK This parameter selects the state of the Parameter Lock. With Parameter Lock you can inhibit unauthorised parameter changes. OPEN Parameter Lock is open. Parameters can be altered. LOCKED Parameter Lock is closed from the Control Panel. Parameters cannot be altered. Only entering the valid code at Parameter 16.3 PASS CODE can open the Parameter Lock. 3 PASS CODE This parameter selects the Pass Code for the Parameter Lock. The default value of this parameter is 0. In order to open the Parameter Lock change the value to 358. After the Parameter Lock is opened the value is automatically changed back to 0. 4 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 If you select NOT SEL, fault reset can only be executed from the Control Panel keypad (Exception: See under “Note” below). If a digital input is selected, fault reset is executed from an external switch, if in External control mode, or from the Control Panel. Reset from a digital input is activated by opening a normally closed contact (negative edge on digital input).7-12 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters Note: Reset from Fieldbus Command word is always available in both Local and External control. Reset from Fieldbus Command word (RESET OVR) is activated on positive edge of signal. 5 USER MACRO NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9; EXT DI10; COMM MODULE CH SRCE This parameter enables the selection of the desired User Macro via a digital input or Fieldbus communication in the following way: When the state of the specified digital input or Fieldbus signal changes from high to low (on negative edge) User Macro 1 is restored. When the state of the specified digital input or Fieldbus signal changes from low to high (on positive edge) User Macro 2 is restored. If the required User Macro does not exist a fault indication is displayed:  0+?6>  ?=/< 7+-< The User Macro used can be changed via a digital input or Fieldbus communication (edge triggered) only after the drive is stopped, i.e. Running = 0. During the change the drive will not start. The acknowledgement signal USER 1 OR 2 (digital output or Fieldbus) indicates when the change is completed and the drive can be started again.6 SHARED MOTION SEL Selection of Shared Motion. OFF Shared motion logic and parameters are not active. ON Shared motion logic and parameters are active. NOTE! –Presumes that par. 16.5 is left on (default) value ‘NOT SEL’. FORCE MOT 2 Shared motion logic and parameters are active. The parameters are forced to motor 2 values. (To be used during commissioning only). NOTE! –Also presumes that par. 16.5 is left on (default) value ‘NOT SEL’.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-13
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.6 Group 17 Test Gen Par These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running, The Range/Unit column in Table 7-6 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-6 Group 17 Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 POT 1 -32768 … CONSTANT TEST 32767 REFERENCE 1 2 POT 2 -32768 … CONSTANT TEST 32767 REFERENCE 2 3 SQR WAVE PERIOD 10 … 100000 SQUARE WAVE ms PERIOD TIME 4 TEST REF SELECT 0; POT1 TEST REFERENCE POT2 SELECTION SQR WAV; TST REF 1 POT 1 Constant test reference 1 for the manual tuning function. Used also for the square wave generator. 2 POT 2 Constant test reference 2 for the manual tuning function. Used also for the square wave generator. 3 SQR WAVE PERIOD The time period of the square wave generator. 4 TEST REF SELECT Manual tuning reference selection for the function selected by the drive mode parameter (15.02) 0: 0 1: POT1 2: POT2 3: SQR WAV 4: TST REF7-14 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.7 Group 20 Limits These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-7 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-7 Group 20. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 MINIMUM SPEED -12 000 … 0 rpm PAGEREFNegative speed reference limit. 2 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 … 12 000 rpm Positive speed reference limit. 5 MAXIMUM TORQUE 0.5 ... 325 % Maximum positive output torque. 6 MINIMUM TORQUE -325 … -1.0 % Minimum negative output torque. 12 CUR LIM MOT 0 … 400 % Current limit for motor BRIDG bridge. 13 CUR LIM GEN -400… 400 % Current limit for BRIDG generator bridge. 14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 0 … 165 DEG Maximum firing angle. 15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 0 … 165 DEG Minimum firing angle. 16 FIELD1 OVRCUR 0 … 200 % Field overcurrent limit LEV for motor 1 . 17 FIELD2 OVRCUR 0 … 200 % Field overcurrent limit LEV for motor 2. 1 MINIMUM SPEED Negative speed reference limit. Internally limited to –((69.01) x 32767 / 20000) … 0 rpm. 2 MAXIMUM SPEED Positive speed reference limit. Internally limited to 0 … ((69.01) x 32767 / 20000 rpm. 5 MAXIMUM TORQUE Maximum positive output torque in per cent of the nominal motor torque. The output torque of the torque selector (including load compensation and torque step) is limited against this value. 6 MINIMUM TORQUE Minimum negative output torque in per cent of the nominal motor torque. The output torque of the torque selector (including load compensation and torque step) is limited against this value.12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDGE Current limit for motor bridge related to the nominal motor current.13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDGE Current limit for generator bridge related to the nom. motor current. Note! This limit low-limited to 0, if single quadrant type converter. 14 MAX FIRING ANGLE Maximum firing angle in degrees.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE Minimum firing angle in degrees.16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV Field overcurrent limit for motor 1 in per cent of the motor 1’s nominal field current.17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV Field overcurrent limit for motor 2 in per cent of the motor 2’s nominal field current.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-15
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.8 Group 23 Speed Ctrl These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-8 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-8 Group 23. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 KPS 0 … 325 Relative gain of the speed controller. 2 TIS 0 … 32767 ms Integral active time of the speed controller. 3 DERIVATION TIME 0 … 10000 ms Derivation time for the speed controller 4 ACC COMP DER 0 … 100 s Derivation time used during TIME acceleration in order to compensate the inertia. 5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 … 10 000 ms Actual speed filter time. 6 SPEED STEP (only -2457 … 2457 Speed step input for for DW) rpm DrivesWindow step gen. The values of these parameters define how the output of the Speed Controller changes when there is a difference (error value) between the actual speed and the displays typical step responses of the Speed Controller. Step responses can be seen by monitoring Actual Signal 1.1 MOTOR SPEED. The dynamic performance of the speed control at low speeds can be improved by increasing the relative gain and decreasing the integration time. Speed controller output is the reference for the torque controller. The torque reference is limited by Parameters 20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE and 20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE.7-16 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters Speed Step height A B C D t A: Undercompensated: 23.2 TIS too long and 23.1 KPS too low B: Normally tuned, autotuning C: Normally tuned. Better dynamic performance than with B D: Overcompensated: 23.2 TIS too short and 23.1 KPS too high Figure 7-2 Step responses of the Speed Controller with different settings. 1 to 10 % reference step is used. Derivative Acceleration Compensation Proportional Speed Error Integral Torque reference value reference Derivative Actual speed Figure 7-3 Speed controller, a simplified block diagram. 1 KPS Relative gain of the speed controller. With the value 1, a speed error of 10 % of the maximum speed (69.1) causes a torque reference of 10 % of the motor’s nominal torque. 2 TIS Integral active time of the speed controller. The time within the integral part of the controller achieves the same value as the proportional part. Setting TIS to 32767 ms disables the integral part of the controller; the integrator’s accumulator is cleared. 3 DERIVATION TIME Derivative action boosts the controller output if the error value changes. The longer the derivation time, the more the speed controller output is boosted during the change. The derivation makes the control more responsive for the disturbances. If derivation time is set to zero, the controller works as a PI controller, otherwise as a PID controller.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-17
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters % Gain = Kp = 1 TI = Integration time > 0 TD = Derivation time > 0 Controller Output Kp ⋅ TD ⋅ ∆e TS = Sample time period = 2 ms Ts Kp ⋅ e ∆e = Error value change between Error Value two samples Kp ⋅ e e = Error value t TI Figure 7-4 Speed Controller Output after an error step when the error remains constant NOTE: Changing this parameter is recommended only if a pulse encoder is used.4 ACC COMP DER TIME Derivation time for compensation of acceleration. In order to compensate inertia during acceleration the derivative of the reference is added to the output of the speed controller. The principle of a derivative action is described in section 3 DERIVATION TIME above. As a general rule, set this parameter to a value from 50 to 100 % of the sum of the mechanical time constants of the motor and the driven machine. No Acceleration Compensation Acceleration Compensation % % Speed Reference Speed Reference Actual Speed Actual Speed t t 5 SP ACT FILT TIME Filter time constant for the actual speed signal. 6 SPEED STEP Speed reference step input (without ramp). Only to be used with DrivesWindow step test generator.7-18 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.9 Group 24 Torque Ctrl These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-9 below shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. These parameters are not visible in Follower drive (with M/F CTRL macro). Table 7-9 Group 24. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 ... Time for reference from 0 to the 120.00 s rated torque. 2 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 ... Time for reference from the rated 120.00 s torque to 0. 3 TORQ STEP -325.00 … Torque step input for 325.00 % DrivesWindow step gen. 1 TORQ RAMP UP Defines the time required for the reference to increase from zero to the rated torque. 2 TORQ RAMP DOWN Defines the time required for the reference to decrease from the rated torque to zero. Note: These parameters do not effect the torque reference sent from master to follower drive in Master/Follower control mode (using Master/Follower bus). 3 TORQ STEP Torque reference step input (without ramp). Only to be used with DrivesWindow step test generatorDCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-19
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.10 Group 28 Motor Protection Table 7-10 Group 28. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC 0… 5400 s Thermal time constant for motor 1. 2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR 0… 245 % Thermal model 1 nominal current. 3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 10… 130 % Alarm limit of the calculated motor’s load integral (model 1). 4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 10… 130 % Tripping limit of the calculated motor’s load integral (model 1). 5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 0… 5400 s Thermal time constant for motor 2. 6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 0… 245 % Thermal model 2 nominal current. 7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 10… 130 % Alarm limit of the calculated motor temperature (model 2). 8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 10… 130 % Tripping limit of the calculated motor temperature (model 2). 9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED; Motor 1 temperature 1 x PT100 measurement mode. 2 x PT100 3 x PT100; PTC; SCALED A/D 10 ALARM LIM M1 -10XXX … Temperature alarm limit for TEMP 4000XXX measured temperature of Motor 1. 11 FAULT LIM M1 -10XXX … Temperature trip limit for TEMP 4000XXX measured temperature of Motor 1. 12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED; Motor 2 temperature 1 x PT100; measurement mode. 2 x PT100; 3 x PT100; PTC; SCALED A/D 13 ALARM LIM M2 -10xxx … Temperature alarm limit for TEMP 4000xxx measured temperature of motor 2. The unit depend on parameter (28.12). 14 FAULT LIM M2 -10xxx … Temperature trip limit for TEMP 4000xxx measured temperature of Motor 2. 18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED; DI selection for motor 1 DI4; NOT temperature switch. USED; DI6; DI7; DI8 19 EARTH CUR FLT NOT USED; Selection for earth fault SEL ACTIVATED monitoring.7-20 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters Parameter Range/Unit Description 20 EARTH CUR FLT 0… 20 A Earth fault current tripping level. LIM 21 EARTH CUR FLT 0… 10000 ms Earth fault time delay. DEL 22 ARMAT OVRVOLT 25… 500 % Armature overvoltage level. LEV 23 SPD MEAS MON 0 .. 7500 rpm Speed measurement monitoring LEV level. 24 SPD EMF MON LEV 0 … 1500 V Speed measurement monitoring, EMF voltage level. 25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED; DI selection for motor 2 DI4; NOT temperature switch. USED; DI6; DI7; DI8 1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC Thermal time constant for motor 1. The time within the temperature rises to 63 % of the nominal value. 2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR Thermal model 1 nominal current. At this current, the output of the thermal model 1 will reach 100 % after 5 x temp model 1 TC (28.01). 3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 Alarm limit of the calculated motor’s load integral (model 1). 4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 Tripping limit of the calculated motor’s load integral (model 1). 5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC Thermal time constant for motor 2. The time within the temperature rises to 63 % of the nominal value. 6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR Thermal model 1 nominal current. At this current, the output of the thermal model 1 will reach 100 % after 5 x temp model 1 TC (28.05). 7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 Alarm limit of the calculated motor temperature (model 2). 8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 Tripping limit of the calculated motor temperature (model 2). 9 MOTOR 1 TEMP SEL Motor 1 temperature measurement mode, using analogue input channel 2: NOT USED 1 • PT100 Cels 2 • PT100 Cels 3 • PT100 Cels PTC Ohm SCALED A/D 10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP Temperature alarm limit for measured temperature of motor 1. The units depend on parameter (28.09). 11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP Temperature trip limit for measured temperature of motor 1. The units depend on parameter (28.09).DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-21
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL Motor 2 temperature measurement mode, using analogue input channel 3: NOT USED 1 • PT100 Cels 2 • PT100 Cels 3 • PT100 Cels PTC Ohm SCALED A/D 13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP Temperature alarm limit for measured temperature of motor 2. The units depend on parameter (28.12). 14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP Temperature trip limit for measured temperature of motor 2. The units depend on parameter (28.12). 18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL DI selection for motor 1 temperature switch. The drive is tripped, if the selected DI is activated. NOT USED DI4 NOT USED DI6 DI7 DI8 19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL Selection for earth fault monitoring NOT USED ACTIVATED 20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM Earth fault current tripping level. 21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL The time delay the earth fault is activated after.22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV Armature overvoltage level in per cent of the supply voltage (42.06).23 SPD MEAS MON LEV Minimum absolute value the measured speed (pulse encoder, is above the tacho) must be when the measured EMF voltage (1.09) is above the limit (28.24). If the measured speed is below this limit, the drive trips (measurement fault). Internal limited to 0 … (69.01) rpm. 24 SPD EMF MON LEV The speed measurement monitoring function is activated, when the measured EMF voltage (1.09) is above the limit programmed to this parameter. See (28.23).7-22 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL DI selection for motor 2 temperature switch. The drive is tripped, if the selected DI is activated. NOT USED DI4 NOT USED DI6 DI7 DI8DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-23
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.11 Group 30 Fault Functions These parameter values can be altered with the DCC 600 running. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-11 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-11 Group 30 Parameter Range/Unit Description 2 PANEL LOSS FAULT; NO Panel loss operation. 3 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL; DI2; External fault input. DI6; DI7; DI8 12 MASTER FAULT FAULT; NO; Operates when there is a FUNC WARNING Fieldbus communication fault (visible only in fieldbus mode) 13 COMM FLT TIME- 0.10… 60.00s Communication fault time OUT (visible only in delay. fieldbus mode) 2 PANEL LOSS Defines the operation of the DCC 600 if the Control Panel selected as the control location for the DCC 600 stops communicating. CAUTION: If you select NO, make sure that it is safe to continue operation in case communication with the Control Panel fails. FAULT Fault indication is displayed (if there are any Control Panels communicating on the link) and the DCC 600 stops (coast stop + set brake). NO No protection provided 3 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 This selection defines the digital input used for an external fault signal. If an external fault occurs, i.e. digital input drops to 0 V, the DCC 600 stops.12 MASTER FAULT FUNC This parameter defines the operation when a fault is detected in the communication between the drive and the fieldbus. FAULT Fault indication MASTER FLT is diplayed and the DCC600 trips. NO No activity wanted. WARNING Warning indication MASTER FLT is displayed.13 COMM FLT TIME-OUT Warning indication MASTER FLT is displayed. This parameter defines the delay time before activating the fault (See par. 30.12).7-24 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.12 Group 40 Undervolt Monit Table 7-12 Group 40. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 U NET MIN 1 0 … 130 % Upper limit for mains undervoltage monitoring. 2 U NET MIN 2 0 … 130 % Lower limit for mains undervoltage monitoring. 3 POWER DOWN TIME 0 … 10000 ms Power down time. 1 U NET MIN 1 Upper limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in per cent of the supply voltage (42.06). If the mains voltage drops below this limit, the controllers are blocked. An undervoltage trip is generated, if the mains voltage doesn’t recover within the time defined by parameter power down time (40.03). 2 U NET MIN 2 Lower limit for mains undervoltage monitoring in per cent of the supply voltage (42.06). Pwrloss trip (15.04) = IMMEDIAT: If the mains voltage drops below this limit, an undervoltage trip is generated. Pwrloss trip (15.04) = DELAYED: If the mains voltage drops below this limit, the controllers are blocked. An undervoltage trip is generated, if the mains voltage doesn’t recover within the time defined by parameter pwr down time (40.03).3 POWER DOWN TIME Within this time the mains voltage must return. Otherwise an undervoltage trip will be generated.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-25
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.13 Group 41 Motor Nom Val Table 7-13 Group 41. Parameter Range/Unit Description 3 MOT 1 NOM FLD 0.3 … 655.3 A Nominal field current of the 1st CUR motor. 10 CUR REF SLOPE 0 … 30 %/ms Current reference slope 11 ARM L 0 … 32767 Armature inductance. 12 ARM R 0 … 32767 Armature resistance. 14 FLD CUR @ 70% 0.0 …100.0% Field current for 40% flux. FLUX 15 FLD CUR @ 70% 0.0 …100.0% Field current for 70% flux. FLUX 16 FLD CUR @ 90% 0.0 …100.0% Field current for 90% flux. FLUX 17 MOT 2 NOM FLD 0.3 … 655.3 A Nominal field current of the 2nd CUR motor. 19 INT EMF REF 10 % … 146 % Nominal EMF value; used as local EMF reference.3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR Nominal field current of the 1st motor. 10 CUR REF SLOPE Current reference slope in per cent of the nominal converter current per 1ms (related to control cycle time 3.3 ms). This parameter limits the current reference slope (di/dt limitation) at the input of the current controller. 11 ARM L Relative inductance of the armature circuit. ARM_L = LA[mH]*CONV_NOM_CURR(4.05)*245 NOM_SUPPLY_VOLT(42.06)*scantime Where LA[mH] = armature (load) inductance in mH Scan time = 3,33 (50 Hz mains) or 2,77 ms (60 Hz) 12 ARM R Relative resistance of the armature circuit. ARM_R = 22444* RA [Ω] * CONV_NOM_CURR(4.05)*245 NOM_SUPPLY_VOLT(42.06) Where RA [Ω] = armature (load) resistance14 FLD CUR @ 40% FLUX Field current for 40 % flux. See chapter 6.4.9 for details.15 FLD CUR @ 70% FLUX Field current for 70 % flux.16 FLD CUR @ 90% FLUX Field current for 90 % flux.7-26 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR Nominal field current of the 2nd motor. 19 INT EMF REF Nominal EMF value; used as local EMF reference. Scaling: 100 % equals NOM SUPPLY VOLT (42.6) voltage level. MOTOR_NOM_VOLTAGE (99.5 ) ∗ 0.95 ∗ 100 Approx. setting [%]: NOM_SUPPLY_VOLT (42.6 )DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-27
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.14 Group 42 Measurement Table 7-14 Group 42. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 MAINS PHASE R – T – S; Main supply phase order. ORDER R–S−T 5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 20 … 400 % Armature overcurrent tripping. 6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT 50 V … 1400 A Nominal supply voltage. 7 S CONV NOM CURR 0 A … 30000 A Set nominal converter current. 8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0 V … 2000 V Set voltage measurement class. 9 S MAX BRIDGE 0 … 150 Cels Set tripping level of converter TEMP heat sink temperature. 10 S CONVERTER NONE; C1; C2; Set converter type. TYPE C3; C4 11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE; Set quadrant type of the 1 QUADRANT; converter. 4 QUADRANT 12 TORQ ACT FTC 0 … 30000 ms Time constant of the motor torque (1.05) low pass filter. 1 MAIN PHASE ORDER Main supply phase order. If the measured phase order does not match with this parameter, the fault “Phase Sequence Order” is generated. R–T–S R–S−T 5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL Armature overcurrent tripping level in per cent of the nominal converter current. 6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT Nominal supply voltage. The default value of this parameter is the converter nominal voltage (4.04): However, if the value of the set nominal voltage (42.08) isn’t zero, this value is used as default value instead. 7 S CONV NOM CURR Set nominal converter current. Note! This parameter overwrites the nominal current of the converter defined by the type code resistors. 0: type code resistors are in use <>0: type code resistors are bypassed 8 S CONV NOM VOLT Set voltage measurement class. Note! This parameter overwrites the voltage measurement settings defined by the type code resistors. 0: type code resistors are in use7-28 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters <>0: type code resistors are bypassed 9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP Set tripping level of converter heat sink temperature. Note! This parameter overwrites the max. bridge temperature defined by the type code resistors. 0: type code resistors are in use <>0: type code resistors are bypassed 10 S CONVERTER TYPE Set converter type. NONE C1 C2 C3 C4 Note! This parameter overwrites the converter type defined by the type code resistors. NONE: type code resistors are in use <> NONE: type code resistors are bypassed 11 S QUADRANT TYPE Set quadrant type of the converter. NONE 1 QUADRANT: 1-quadrant converter 4 QUADRANT: 4-quadrant converter Note! This parameter overwrites the quadrant type of the converter defined by the type code resistors. NONE: type code resistors are in use <> NONE: type code resistors are bypassed 12 TORQ ACT FTC Time constant of the motor torque (1.05) low pass filter.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-29
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.15 Group 43 Current Control Table 7-15 Group 43. Parameter Range/UnitDescription 2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN 3 … 2997 P-gain of PI current controller. 3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN 0 … 31968 Integral time constant of PI current controller. 6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT 0 … 100% Current level between discontinuous and continuous current. 10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT; FC1 Current ripple monitoring WARN; FC2 selection. FAULT; FC 2 WARN 11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0 … 800 % Treshhold for current ripple monitoring (function 1) and thyristor diagnosis. 12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 0 … 800 % Treshhold for current ripple monitoring (function 2). 15 REV GAP 0 …50 Max. allowed number of control cycles for bridge reversal. 2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN P-gain of PI current controller. 3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI current controller. 6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT Current level between discontinuous and continuous current. 10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT Selects whether the reaction on current ripple is fault or warning and which function is to be used. FC 1 FAULT function 1, fault FC 1 WARN function 1, warning FC 2 FAULT function 2, fault FC 2 WARN function 2, warning 11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 Treshhold for current ripple monitoring (function 1) and thyristor diagnosis. 12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 Treshhold for current ripple monitoring (function 2). 15 REV GAP If Bridge reversal takes longer than [43.15+2] control cycles, fault “65 REVER FLT” is activated. 1 control cycle = 3.3 ms at 50 Hz.7-30 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.16 Group 44 Field Excitation Table 7-16 Group 44. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0 … 32767 Filter time constant for 1st field actual current. 2 P-GAIN FEX 1 0 … 4096 P-gain for 1st FEX. 3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 0 … 40960 ms Integral time constant for 1st FEX. 7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0 … 32767 Filter time constant for 2nd field actual current. 8 P-GAIN FEX 2 0 … 4096 P-gain for 2nd FEX. 9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 0 … 40960 ms Integral time constant for 2nd FEX. 13 FIELD 1 REF RED 0 … 100 % 1st field reduced current reference. 17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 0 … 100 % Tripping level of minimum 1st field current. 21 FIELD 2 REF RED 0 … 100 % 2nd field reduced current reference. 22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 0 … 100 % Tripping level of minimum 2nd field current. 1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC Filter time constant for 1st field actual current. Scaling: 1=10ms) 2 P-GAIN FEX 1 P-gain for 1st field exciter’s PI controller. 3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 Integral time constant for 1st field exciter’s PI controller. 7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC Filter time constant for 2nd field actual current. (Scaling: 1=10ms) 8 P-GAIN FEX 2 P-gain for 2nd field exciter’s PI controller. 9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 Integral time constant for 2nd field exciter’s PI controller. 13 FIELD 1 REF RED 1st field current reference on heating or standstill. 17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP Tripping level of minimum 1st field current. 21 FIELD 2 REF RED 2nd field current reference on heating or standstill. 22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP Tripping level of minimum 2nd field current.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-31
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.17 Group 46 EMF Control Table 7-17 Group 46. Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 POS LIM EMF CON 0 … 100 % Positive limit for EMF controller. 2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100 … 0 % Negative limit for EMF controller. 3 EMF CON KP 1 … 32767 P-gain of EMF controller. 4 EMF CON KI 0 … 32767 Integral time constant of EMF controller. 5 EMF CON BLOCK 0 … 36 % EMF controller block level. LEV 6 EMF ACT FILT TC 0 … 10000 ms Filter time constant for EMF actual value. 9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 0 … 10000 ms Filter time constant for EMF speed measurement. 11 V STEP -500% … 500% Voltage step value. 1 POS LIM EMF CON Positive limit for EMF controller. 2 NEG LIM EMF CON Negative limit for EMF controller. 3 EMF CON KP P-gain of EMF controller. 4 EMF CON KI Integral time constant of EMF controller.5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV EMF controller block level. When the measured EMF is below this limit, the EMF controller is blocked. 6 EMF ACT FILT TC Filter time constant for calculated EMF actual value at the input of the EMF controller. 9 EMF SPEED FILT TC Filter time constant for calculated EMF used for speed measurement supervision. 11 V STEP Voltage step value in per cent of the nominal supply voltage (=42.6). Is added to the output of the voltage reference slope function. NOTE: Only used with DrivesWindow step function.7-32 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.18 Group 50 Speed Measuring Table 7-18 Group 50. Parameter Range/Unit Description 2 SPEED MEAS MODE A_- B DIR; A _-_; Encoder evaluation mode A _-_ B DIR; selection for encoder. A _-_ B _-_ 3 SPEED FB SEL CALC BY EMF; Speed feedback selection. CON-ENCODER; NTAC MODULE; ANALOG TAC 4 ENCODER PULSE 125 … 6000 Pulse count per revolution of NR the encoder. 2 SPEED MEAS MODE Encoder evaluation mode selection for the encoder connected to SDCS- CON-2. A_-B DIR rising edge of track A, track B direction A _-_ both edges of track A A _-_ B DIR both edges of track A, track B direction A _-_ B _-_ both edges of both tracks 3 SPEED FB SEL Speed feedback selection: CALC BY EMF calculated by EMF CON-ENCODER measured by encoder connected to SDCS-CON-2 NTAC MODULE Measured by encoder, connected to a Pulse Encoder Interface Module, type NTAC. NOTE: Not supported in DCC600. ANALOG TAC analogue tacho connected to AITAC input 4 ENCODER PULSE NR Pulse count per revolution of the encoder connected to SDCS-CON-2.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-33
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.19 Group 51 Master Adapter For information on these parameters see manual: Fieldbus adapter NxxA-01 Installation & Start-up Guide for the respective type used.7.2.20 Group 60 Local operation The Range/Unit column in Table 7-19 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-19 Group 60 Parameter Range/unit Description 1 LOC OPER INH True ; False Local operation inhibit. 2 LOC SPEED MAX 0.0 … 100.0 % Local speed maximum. 3 LOC ZERO SPEED TD 0.0 ... 300.0 s Local zero speed time delay. 1 LOC OPER INH True Only possible to run in External control. Note: Panel will show "L" indication even though drive is in External control. False Possible to run in LOCAL (panel) control and External control 2 LOC SPEED MAX The maximum speed reference when running in LOCAL3 LOC ZERO SPEED TD After making LOCAL START the ZERO SPEED signal has to become ”0”, that is motor start running, before the time LOC ZERO SPEED TD has expired otherwise the start order is removed and drive is switched off.7-34 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.21 Group 61 Speed monitor The Range/Unit column in Table 7-20 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-20 Group 67. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 ZERO SPEED LEV 0.00 ...100.0 % Zero speed level 2 ZERO SPEED TIME 0...10000 ms Zero speed time 3 MOT OVERSPEED LEV 0....200 % Motor overspeed level 1 ZERO SPEED LEV Parameter for setting the speed level for ZERO SPEED indication, in % of parameter 69.1 "Speed scaling rpm". 2 ZERO SPEED TIME Time delay before signal ZERO SPEED is set to ”1” when the motor speed is below ZERO SPEED LEV.3 MOT OVERSPEED LEV If the motor speed exceeds the level determined by MOT OVERSPEED LEV the drive trips, indicating MOT OVERSP.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-35
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.22 Group 62 Torque Monitor The Range/Unit column in Table 7-21 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-21 Group 62. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 TORQ MON SEL True ; False Torque monitor select 2 SP DEV LEV 0 ... 100 % Speed deviation level 3 TORQ FLT TD 0...60000 ms Torque fault time delay 4 SP DER BLK LEV 0...100 % / s Speed derivative blocking level 1 TORQ MON SEL True Torque monitor is activated False Torque monitor is blocked 2 SP DEV LEV A level above SP DEV LEV means that the speed error is too high 3 TORQ FLT TD If a speed error higher than SP DEV LEV occurs, and if it lasts longer than the time TORQ FLT TD the drive will trip, indicating TORQ FLT message. 4 SP DER BLK LEV The protection is blocked during acceleration and deceleration if the sign of the speed error is OK and if the derivative of the actual speed is higher than the setting of SP DER BLK LEV7-36 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.23 Group 63 Fast stop The Range/Unit column in Table 7-22 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-22 Group 63. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1; Fast stop type 11 FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3 2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1; Fast stop type 12 FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3 1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 Parameter for selecting type of fast stop action in Fieldbus mode. Activated if signal FAST STOP 11 in Fieldbus communication Command word (Dataset1 Word1 bit 10) is set true. NOT USED: No activity wanted. FAST STOP 1: Fast stop by braking on torque limit. FAST STOP 2: Fast stop by braking with both mechanical brake and on torque limit. FAST STOP 3: Fast stop by braking with mechanical brake only. 2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 Parameter for selecting type of fast stop action in Stand alone mode. Activated by e.g. input Ext DI10. Refer to Parameter 63.1 for setting alternatives.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-37
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.24 Group 64 Crane The Range/Unit column in Table 7-23 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-23 Group 64. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 STAND ALONE SEL True; False Stand Alone Select 2 CONTIN GEAR True; False Continuous gear 3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 0.0 ... 100.0 % High speed level 1 4 DEADZONE A 0 ... 100 % Deadzone A 5 DEADZONE B 0 ... 100 % Deadzone B 6 REF SHAPE 0 ... 100 Reference shape 7 SLOWDOWN 0 ... 100 % Slowdown speed SPEEDREF reference 8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Zero position OK time delay 9 TORQUE REF SCALE 0.00 ... 4.00 Torque reference scaling. 10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK; RADIO Control type selection CTRL; MOTOR POT; STEP JOYST; STEP RADIO 11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 ... 100.0 % Minimum reference 12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 0 ... 5000 ms Joystick warning time delay 13 STEP REF LEVEL1 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 1 14 STEP REF LEVEL2 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 2 15 STEP REF LEVEL3 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 3 16 STEP REF LEVEL4 0.0 … 100.0 % Step reference level 4 1 STAND ALONE SEL True Stand alone mode is selected. False Fieldbus mode is selected.7-38 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 2 CONTIN GEAR True Normally joystick movement zero to maximum equals zero to base speed reference. If the power optimisation calculates a higher speed reference, than the maximum reference from the controller is recalculated to correspond to the highest speed reached in field weakening. False Means that zero to maximum movement of the joystick is always zero to base speed reference. If the power optimisation calculates a higher speed reference than base speed the speed will increase to the calculated value with the joystick in maximum position. When pulling back the joystick to e.g. 90 % the speed reference will then be reduced to 90 % of base speed.3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 Joystick output (AI1) signal level to give HIGH SPEED OK signal for power optimisation. 4 DEADZONE A Deadzone on the joystick before it starts to give reference in direction A (positive, e.g. hoisting direction) 5 DEADZONE B Deadzone on the joystick before it starts to give reference in direction B (negative, e.g. lowering direction) 6 REF SHAPE Parameter for making a parabolic curve for the reference 0 = straight line 20 = X2 curve 100 = X3 curve7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF Maximum speed reference level (limitation) when slow down function is activated (e.g. Ext DI9=0). Scaling: 100% = parameter 69.1 level. 8 ZERO POS OK TD Time delay for the joystick to stay in zero position before a new start order can be given after a stop from: trip, fast stop or joystick warning. 9 TORQUE REF SCALE Scaling of torque reference from joystick (AI.2). E.g. with TORQUE REF SCALE set to 2.0: a 100 % joystick reference will give 200 % torque reference to the torque controller 10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by using a joystick controller, with Zero Pos (e.g. DI2), Dir A (DI7) and Dir B (DI8) contacts connected to digital inputs and analogue reference connected to AI1 (speed control) or AI2 (torque control). Joystick supervision is active. RADIO CONTROL External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by connecting signals from a radio controller or PLC to drive I/O. Dir A and Dir B orders connected to DI7 and DI8. Reference connected to AI1 or AI2.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-39
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters MOTOR POT External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by using e.g. a pendant controller giving direction and increase orders. Increase orders connected to e.g. DI2, Dir A and Dir B connected to DI7 and DI8. STEP JOYST External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by using a joystick controller, with Zero Pos (e.g. DI2), Dir A (DI7) and Dir B (DI8) contacts connected to digital inputs and Step type of speed reference connected to digital inputs selected with parameters 10.8 – 10.10. Joystick supervision is active. STEP RADIO External control of drive, in Stand alone mode, is done by connecting signals from a radio controller or PLC to drive I/O. Dir A and Dir B orders connected to DI7 and DI8. Step type of speed reference connected to digital inputs selected with parameters 10.8 – 10.10. 11 MINIMUM REF Minimum speed reference in stand alone mode. Normally used with MOTOR POT control type.12 JOYSTICK WARN TD Time delay for joystick supervision. 13 STEP REF LEVEL1 First speed reference level applied from startorder, i.e. DirA or DirB, when using STEP JOYST or STEP RADIO control types. 14 STEP REF LEVEL2 Second speed reference level applied when digital input, selected by parameter 10.8 STEP REF2 SEL, is activated (plus start order active). 15 STEP REF LEVEL3 Third speed reference level applied when digital input, selected by parameter 10.9 STEP REF3 SEL, is activated (plus step ref2 conditions still active). 16 STEP REF LEVEL4 Fourth speed reference level applied when digital input, selected by parameter 10.10 STEP REF4 SEL, is activated (plus step ref3 conditions still active).7-40 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.25 Group 65 Logic handler The Range/Unit column in Table 7-24 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-24 Group 65. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 CONTIN ON True ; False Continuing on 2 OFF TD 0.0 ... 10000.0 s Off time delay 1 CONTIN ON Contactors will remain on without time limit after the motor is stopped, if parameter CONTIN ON = True. 2 OFF TD The time for how long the contactors shall remain on after the motor is stopped.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-41
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.26 Group 66 Torque Proving The Range/Unit column in Table 7-25 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-25 Group 66. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 TORQ PROV SEL True ; False Torque proving select 2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.0 ... 100.0 s Torque proving fault time delay 3 TORQ PROV REF -200.0 ... 200.0 % Torque proving reference 4 REGEN TEST SEL True; False Regenerative bridge test select. 1 TORQ PROV SEL True Torque proving active (requires pulse encoder). False Torque proving not active. 2 TORQ PROV FLT TD Time delay for fault signal TORQ PROV FLT 3 TORQ PROV REF Torque proving reference level. 4 REGEN TEST SEL True Torque proving test performed with both motoring (forward) and regenerative (reverse) bridge. False Torque proving test performed only with motoring (forward) bridge.7-42 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.27 Group 67 Mechanical brake contr. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-26 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-26 Group 67. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 BRAKE FALL TIME 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake falling time 2 BRAKE FLT TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake fault time delay 3 BRAKE INT ACKN True ; False Brake internal acknowledge select 4 BRAKE LIFT TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake lift time delay 5 BRAKE LONG FT TD 0.0 ... 60.0 s Brake long falling time delay 1 BRAKE FALL TIME Falling time for the mechanical brake. Time for brake to set and give full braking torque after brake close order (brake electrical supply disconnected). 2 BRAKE FLT TD Time delay for BRAKE FAULT signal. 3 BRAKE INT ACKN True Internal acknowledge ” brake lifted ”, digital input signal not used. False External acknowledge ” brake lifted ” connected to digital input e.g. DI6. 4 BRAKE LIFT TD Time delay for brake lift order, after speed reference is connected to speed controller. 5 BRAKE LONG FT TD Time delay for monitoring signal ”brake long falltime ”DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-43
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.28 Group 68 Power optimisation The Range/Unit column in Table 7-27 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-27 Group 68. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 POWOP SELECT True ; False Power optimisation select 2 BASE SPEED 1.0 ... 100.0 % Base speed 3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL True ; False Powop autotune select 4 INERTIA TOTAL UP 0.00 ... 100.00 Inertia total upwards kgm2 5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN 0.00 ... 100.00 Inertia total kgm2 downwards 6 TQLIM UP 0.0 ... 200.0 % Powop torque limit upwards 7 TQLIM DWN 0.0 ... 200.0 % Powop torque limit downwards 8 POWOP RESET LEV 0 ... 100 % Power optimisation reset level 1 POWOP SELECT True Power optimisation is active (only used on hoist drive). False Power optimisation not active. 2 BASE SPEED Normally the speed where field weakening starts and the available RMS power of the motor is constant. Full load torque possible for mechanics up to this speed. 3 POWOP AUTOTUNE True SEL Activates the tuning. Note: Parameter is reset to False after each calculated Total inertia value. The value of the inertia can be read in actual signal no.1.24 TOTAL INERTIA An average value after running 2-3 times in each direction should than be entered to parameters INERTIA TOTAL UP and INERTIA TOTAL DWN respectively False Autotune mode not active7-44 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 4 INERTIA TOTAL UP Total inertia in upwards direction 5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN Total inertia in downwards direction 6 TQLIM UP Maximum load torque allowed upwards (=field weakening power limit) 7 TQLIM DWN Maximum load torque allowed downwards (=field weakening power limit) 8 POWOP RESET LEV Speed level (in % of base speed) where the calculated power optimisation reference will be reset to be prepared for a new calculation during the next acceleration.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-45
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.29 Group 69 Reference Handler The Range/Unit column in Table 7-28 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-28 Group 69. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 SPEED SCALING RPM 0 ... 5000 rpm Maximum speed 2 ACC TIME FORW 0.1 ... 60.0 s Acceleration time forward 3 ACC TIME REV 0.1 ... 60.0 s Acceleration time reverse 4 DEC TIME FORW 0.1 ... 60.0 s Deceleration time forward 5 DEC TIME REV 0.1 ... 60.0 s Deceleration time reverse 6 S-RAMP TC 0.0...10.0 s S-ramp time constant 7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 0.5 ... 100.0 Ramp scale local 8 SPEED REF TD 0.05 ... 10.00 s Speed reference time delay 9 START TORQ SEL NOT USED; Start torque select AUTO TQ MEM; LOAD MEAS 10 RAMP RATE=1 True ; False Ramp rate set equal to 11 SPEED SCALING RPM Setting of motor shaft rotational speed (rpm) corresponding to 100 % speed reference = maximum operating speed. NOTE: Must be set in the range of 87%…500% of the motor nominal speed (99.08). Otherwise an alarm (SPEED SCALE) is generated 2 ACC TIME FORW Setting of acceleration ramp time forward direction (up), 0 to +100 % speed (where 100% corresponds to parameter 69.1). 3 ACC TIME REV Setting of acceleration ramp time reverse direction (down), 0 to -100 % speed (ref. parameter 69.1). 4 DEC TIME FORW Setting of deceleration ramp time forward direction, +100 to 0 % speed (ref. parameter 69.1). 5 DEC TIME REV Setting of deceleration ramp time reverse direction, -100 to 0 % speed (ref. parameter 69.1). 6 S-RAMP TC Setting of the s-curve time constant in the speed reference ramp unit. 7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL Scaling (multiplying) factor for ramp times when running in local 8 SPEED REF TD Time delay before connecting speed reference to ramp unit.7-46 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 9 START TORQ SEL NOT USED: No extra starting torque. AUTO TQ MEM: Automatic torque memory selected. LOAD MEAS: Starting torque reference is received from an superior controller e. g. measurement from a load cell. 10 RAMP RATE=1 Selection in Fieldbus mode if RAMP RATE signal from superior controller is not required by drive. True The RAMP RATE signal available from Fieldbus communication is not active, set fixed to 1.0. False The RAMP RATE signal from Fieldbus communication (DS3.1) is active.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-47
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.30 Group 70 Position measurement The Range/Unit column in Table 7-29 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-29 Group 70. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 POS SCALE 1.00 ... 32767.00 Position scaling PPU 2 SYNC COND Pos; Neg Synchronisation condition 1 POS SCALE Set position counter scaling factor, POS SCALE, as number of Pulses Per Unit, e.g. pulses/mm. (Position measurement value POSACT = Pulse counter / POS SCALE.) Example how to calculate POS SCALE: Hoist operating speed 40 m/min (40.000 mm/min) corresponding to motor speed of 980 rpm. Pulse encoder with 1024 ppr (parameter 50.4). Speed measuring set to use all 4 edges (parameter 50.2=default). This gives us POS SCALE = (980 * 1024 * 4) / 40.000 = 100.35 pulses/mm. 2 SYNC COND Pos The HW synchronisation acts on positive edge (0 -> 1) of e.g. DI7 Neg The HW synchronisation acts on negative edge (1 -> 0) of e.g. DI77-48 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.31 Group 71 Fieldbus Comm The Range/Unit column in Table 7-30 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-30 Group 71. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 COMTEST FLT TD 0...32767 ms Communication fault time delay 4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE; Advant controller STD DRIVE communication type 1 COMTEST FLT TD If the Fieldbus communication toggle bit, being sent between the drive and supervisory controller and back, is not changing within the time set in COMTEST FLT TD the drive trips, indicating MAS OSC FLT.4 ADVANT COMM TYPE Selection of Advant controller communication type if communicating via Advant controller Module bus port (AC70, AC80, AC410 with FCI or AC450 with FCI). ENG DRIVE "Engineered" type of Advant communication, corresponding to Advant Database element DRIENG. Maximum 10 datasets/direction possible i.e. all DCC600 datasets (1 – 10) are accessable. STD DRIVE "Standard" type of Advant communication, corresponding to Advant Database element DRISTD. Maximum 2 datasets/direction possible i.e. only DCC600 datasets 1 – 4 are accessable.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-49
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.32 Group 72 Master/Follower The Range/Unit column in Table 7-31 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-31 Group 72. Parameter Range/unit Description 1 MAST/FOLL MODE OFF; MASTER; Master/Follower FOLLOWER mode selection (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 2 TORQUE SELECTOR ZERO; SPEED; Torque selector TORQUE; MINIMUM; setting MAXIMUM; ADD 3 LOAD SHARE 0.0 ... 400.0 % (visible Load sharing only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 4 WINDOW SEL ON OFF; ON Window ctrl selection on 5 WINDOW WIDTH POS 0.0 ...12000.0 rpm Window width positive 6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG -12000.0 rpm...0.0 rpm Window width negative 7 DROOP RATE 0.00 % ... 800.00 % Droop rate 8 TORQ REF A FTC 0 ... 32767 ms (visible Torque reference only if M/F CTRL A filter time macro selected) constant 9 M/F FAULT TD 0 ... 32767 ms (visible Master/Follower only if M/F CTRL fault time delay macro selected) 10 M/F COMM ERR TD 0 ... 32767 ms (visible Master/Follower only if M/F CTRL communication macro selected) error time delay 11 MF BROADCAST NO; YES Master/Follower MODE broadcast mode 1 MAST/FOLL MODE Master and follower drive operating mode. OFF Master or Follower drive not activated, only separate control (or Local) available. MASTER Drive selected to be the Master drive in M/F control. FOLLOWER Drive selected to be the Follower drive in M/F control.7-50 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 2 TORQUE SELECTOR Mode selection for Follower drive. ZERO Torque selector parameter not active (speed or torque control selection done with I/O or Fieldbus in normal way). SPEED Drive is speed controlled. Receiving speed reference (before ramp!) from Master drive if M/F ctrl macro active i.e. using M/F bus comm. TORQUE Drive is torque controlled. Receiving torque reference from Master drive if M/F ctrl macro active (Torq ref A), i.e. load sharing between Master and Follower. MINIMUM Torque selector compares the torque reference and the output of the speed controller. The lower value is used as the reference for motor torque control. Receiving speed and torque references from Master drive if M/F ctrl macro active. This mode should normally not be used with a crane drive! MAXIMUM Torque selector compares the torque reference and the output of the speed controller. The higher value is used as the reference for motor torque control. Receiving speed and torque references from Master drive if M/F ctrl macro active. This mode should normally not be used with a crane drive! ADD Torque selector adds the speed controller output to torque reference. The drive is torque controlled in normal operating range. The selection ADD together with the window control form a speed supervision function for a torque controlled Follower drive: Œ In normal operating range, the Follower follows the torque reference (TORQ REF A). Œ Window control keeps the speed controller input and output to zero as long as the speed error (speed reference - actual speed) remains within a certain window Œ If the speed error goes out of the window, window control connects the increases or decreases the internal torque reference, stopping the rise or fall of the actual speed.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-51
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters Window Control 72.6 WINDOW Speed Reference WIDTH NEG 72.5 WINDOW WIDTH POS e Actual Speed Torque Reference Internal Torque Reference = G = Speed controller gain Torque Reference + Speed Controller Output e= Value G⋅e connected to speed Speed Controller Output controller Time 3 LOAD SHARE Follower drive setting adjusts the load split between Master and Follower. 100% setting causes the Follower drive to produce the same percent of motor nominal torque as the Master drive, i.e. 50/50 load split. 4 WINDOW SEL ON Window control together with the selection of ADD of Parameter 72.2 TORQUE SELECTOR form a speed supervision function for a torque controlled drive. OFF Window control is off. ON Window control is on. This selection should be used only when Parameter 72.2 TORQUE SELECTOR is set to ADD. Window control supervises the speed error value (Speed Reference - Actual Speed). In normal operating range the window control keeps the speed controller input at zero. The speed controller is evoked only if: Œ the speed error exceeds the value of Parameter 72.5 WINDOW WIDTH POS or Œ the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds the value of Parameter 72.6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG. When the speed error goes outside the window the exceeding part of the error value is connected to the speed controller. The speed controller produces a reference term relative to the input and gain of the speed controller (Parameter 23.1 KPS) which the torque selector adds to the torque reference. The result is used as the internal torque reference for DCC 600.7-52 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters For example, in a load loss condition, the internal torque reference of the drive is decreased, preventing the excessive rise of motor speed. If the window control were inactivated, the motor speed would rise until a speed limit of the DCC 600 was reached. Parameters 20.1 MINIMUM SPEED and 20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED set the speed limits.5 WINDOW WIDTH POS This parameter value is considered only if the window control is on. The allowed setting range is from 0 to 1500 rpm. The speed controller input is kept to zero until the positive speed error exceeds the value WINDOW WIDTH POS.6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG This parameter value is considered only if the window control is on. The allowed setting range is from 0 to 1500 rpm. The speed controller input is kept to zero until the absolute value of the negative speed error exceeds WINDOW WIDTH NEG. 7 DROOP RATE This parameter value needs to be changed only if both the Master and the Follower are speed controlled. CAUTION ! Follower speed control or drooping should not be used if the motor shafts of the Master and the Follower are solidly coupled together (e.g. gearbox or common rail). Drooping slightly decreases the drive speed as the drive load increases in order to provide better load sharing between the Master and Follower drives. The correct droop rate for each installation needs to be determined case by case. If drooping is used it is recommended to set some droop rate both for the Follower and Master drives. The droop rate is set as % of the drive maximum speed. The actual speed decrease in a certain operating point depends on the droop rate setting and the internal torque reference of the drive (speed controller output). Speed Decrease = Drooping ⋅ Speed Controller Output ⋅ Max. Speed Calculation Example: DROOP RATE is 1%. Speed Controller Output is 50% and Motor maximum speed of the drive is 1500 rpm. Speed Speed decrease = 0.01 ⋅ 0.50 ⋅ 1500 rpm = 7.5 rpm (%) No Drooping Par. 72.7 DROOP RATE Drooping Speed Controller Output (%) 100% At 100 % speed controller output, drooping is at its maximum level i.e. equal to the value of the DROOP RATE. The drooping effect decreases linearly to zero along with the decreasing load.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-53
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 8 TORQ REF A FTC Filtering time constant for torque reference TORQ REF A in Follower drive, received from Master drive. 9 M/F FAULT TD When the Follower drive have received start-order from Master drive, both drives check that they have signal RUNNING=1 within the time M/F FAULT TD. If not the drive will trip, indicating MF RUN FLT. NOTE: Master drive will trip as a result of a Follower drive tripping 10 M/F COMM ERR TD As soon as the Master and the Follower are activated (Parameter 72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE), they start to monitor a bus communication toggle bit that is sent between the two drives. If the toggle bit stops longer than the time M/F COMM ERR TD the drive trips, indicating MF COMM ERR. NOTE: This delay for MF COMM ERR is not active if using Master/Follower Broadcast mode.11 MF BROADCAST MODE Enable Master/Follower broadcast mode if multiple Follower drives are required. Set = YES in both broadcast Master and Followers. If broadcast mode is selected, Master drive will send only Speed and Torque reference to all drives set as Followers (par. 72.1). Master and Followers to have channel 2 connected together in a closed optical ring. On and Start orders must be connected via I/O or Fieldbus (Standalone or Fieldbus mode used, par. 64.1) directly to each drive in Master as well as Followers. Also monitoring of e.g. Running signal from all drives must be done externally. NO Master/Follower Broadcast mode disabled. Normal point-to-point Master/Follower communication with only one Follower is possible. YES Master/Follower Broadcast mode is enabled.7-54 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.33 Group 80 Shared motion This group is not visible when parameter 16.6=OFF. The Range/Unit column in Table 7-32 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-32 Group 80 Parameter Range/unit Description 1 BRAKE ACKN SEL 2 NOT USED; DI2; Brake acknowledge digital DI6; DI7; DI8 input, motor 2 2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKE Refer to text below LIFT 3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKE Refer to text below LIFT 4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 0.5 … 325.0% Maximum positive output torque, motor 2 5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 -325.0…-1.0% Minimum negative output torque, motor 2 6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 0.0 … 400.0% Current limit for motor bridge, motor 2 7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 -400.0 … 400.0% Current limit for generator bridge, motor 2 8 KPS 2 0.0 … 325.0 Relative gain of the speed controller, motor 2 9 TIS 2 0 … 32767 ms Integral active time of the speed controller, motor 2 10 ARM L 2 0.0 … 32767.0 Armature inductance, motor 2 11 ARM R 2 0.0 … 32767.0 Armature inductance, motor 2 12 INT EMF REF 2 10.0 … 146.0 % Nominal EMF value, motor 2 13 ARM CUR PO PGAIN2 3.0 … 2997.0 P-gain of PI current controller, motor 2 14 ARM CUR PI IGAIN2 0.0 … 31968.0 Integral time constant of PI current controller, motor 2 15 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 0.0 … 100.0% Current level between discontinuous and continuous current, motor 2 16 SPEED FB SEL 2 Refer to text below Speed feedback selection, motor 2 17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 0.0 … 100.0 % Zero speed level, motor 2 18 SP DEV LEV 2 0 … 100% Speed deviation level, motor 2 19 TORQ FLT TD 2 0 … 60000ms Torque fault time delay, motor 2 20 SP DER BLK LEV 2 0 … 100% /s Speed derivative blocking level, motor 2 21 TORQ PROV SEL 2 True; False Torque proving select, motor 2 22 POWOP SELECT 2 True; False Power optimisation select, motor 2 23 BASE SPEED 2 1.0 … 100.0% Base speed, motor 2 24 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 0 … 5000 rpm Maximum speed, motor 2 25 ACC TIME FORW 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Acceleration time forward, motor 2 26 ACC TIME REV 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Acceleration time reverse, motor 2DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-55
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters Parameter Range/unit Description 27 DEC TIME FORW 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Deceleration time forward, motor 2 28 DEC TIME REV 2 0.1 … 60.0 s Deceleration time reverse, motor 2 29 SPEED REF TD 2 0.05 … 10.00s Speed reference time delay, motor 2 30 START TORQ SEL 2 NOT USED; AUTO Start torque select, motor 2 TQ MEM; LOAD MEAS 31 POS SCALE 2 1.00 … Position scaling, motor 2 32767.00PPU 32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 5.0 … 1800.0 V Nominal voltage from the motor rating plate, motor 2 33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 0.0 …10000.0A Matches the DCC600 to the rated motor current, motor 2 34 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2 20.0 … 7500.0 rpm Nominal speed from the motor rating plate, motor 2 35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD 0.0 … 5.0 S Motor 1 or motor 2 parameters ready time delay 1 BRAKE ACKN SEL 2 Selection of digital input for brake acknowledge, when motor 2. NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 This parameter allows you to select which information is indicated with digital output 4, when motor 2. NOT USED BRAKE LIFT Signal for control of the mechanical br5ake on motor 2. 3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 Refer to parameter 80.2 (=DO4 OUTPUT 2). 4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 Maximum positive output torque for motor 2, in per cent of the nominal motor torque. The output torque of the torque selector (including load compensation and torque step) is limited against this value. 5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 Minimum negative output torque for motor 2, in per cent of the nominal motor torque. The output torque of the torque selector (including load compensation and torque step) is limited against this value. 6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 Current limit for the motor bridge, related to the nominal current of motor 2. 7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 Current limit for the generator bridge, related to the nominal current of motor 2. NOTE! This limit is low-limited to ∅, if single quadrant type converter. 8 KPS 2 Relative gain of the speed controller, for motor 2. 9 TIS 2 Integral active time of the speed controller, for motor 2.7-56 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 10 ARM L 2 Relative inductance of the armature circuit of motor 2. (For more information, see par. 41.11). 11 ARM R 2 Relative resistance of the armature circuit of motor 2. (For more information, see par. 41.12). 12 INT EMF REF 2 Nominal EMF value for motor 2. Used as local EMF reference. (For more information, see par. 41.19).13 ARM CUR PI PGAIN 2 P-gain of PI current controller, motor 2.14 ARM CUR PI IGAIN 2 Integral time constant of PI current controller, motor 2. 15 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 Current level between discontinuous and continuous current, motor 2. 16 SPEED FB SEL 2 Speed feedback selection for motor 2: CALC BY EMF calculated by EMF CON-ENCODER measured by encoder connected to SDCS.CON-2 NTAC MODULE measured by encoder, connected to a Pulse Encoder Interface Module, type NTAC. NOTE: Not supported in DCC600 ANALOG TAC analogue tacho connected to AITAC input 17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 Parameter for setting the speed level for ZERO SPEED indication, motor 2. 18 SP DEV LEV 2 A level above this parameter means that the speed error is too high, motor 2. 19 TORQ FLT TD 2 If a speed error higher than SP DEV LEV 2 occurs for motor 2, and if it lasts longer than the time TORQ FLT TD 2, the drive will trip, indicating TORQ FLT. 20 SP DER BLK LEV 2 The torque fault protection is blocked during acceleration and deceleration on motor 2, if the sign of the speed error is OK, and if the derivative of the actual speed is higher than the setting of this parameter. 21 TORQ PROV SEL 2 True Torque proving is active on motor 2 (pulse encoder is required). False Torque proving is not active on motor 2. 22 POWOP SELECT 2 True Power optimisation is active on motor 2. False Power optimisation is not active on motor 2.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-57
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 23 BASE SPEED 2 Normally the speed where field weakening starts, and the available RMS power of the motor is constant, motor 2.24 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 Setting of motor 2 maximum shaft rotational speed (rpm), corresponding to 100 % speed reference. 25 ACC TIME FORW 2 Setting of acceleration ramp time forward direction (up), for motor 2, 0 to + 100% speed (where 100% corresponds to parameter 80.24). 26 ACC TIME REV 2 Setting of acceleration ramp time reverse direction (down), for motor 2, 0 to + 100% speed (ref. parameter 80.24). 27 DEC TIME FORW 2 Setting of deceleration ramp time forward direction for motor 2, + 100 to 0 % speed (ref. parameter 80.24). 28 DEC TIME REV 2 Setting of decleration ramp time reverse direction for motor 2, -100 to 0 % speed (ref. parameter 80.24). 29 SPEED REF TD 2 Time delay before connecting speed reference to ramp unit, motor 2. 30 START TORQ SEL 2 Start torque selection for motor 2: NOT USED: No extra starting torque. AUTO TQ MEM: Automatic torque memory selected. LOAD MEAS: Starting torque reference is received from an superior controller e.g. measurement from a load cell. 31 POS SCALE 2 Set position counter scaling factor for motor 2, POS SCALE 2, as number of Pulses Per Unit, e.g. pulses/mm. (For more information, see par. 70.1).32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 This parameter matches the DCC 600 with the nominal armature voltage of motor 2, as indicated on the motor rating plate.33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 This parameter matches the DCC 600 to the rated armature current of motor 2. 35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD Time delay before giving signal “parameters ready” (User 1 or 2) after a switch-over between motor 1 and motor 2.7-58 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.34 Group 92 Dataset TR Addr The Range/Unit column in Table 7-33 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-33 Group 92 Parameter Range/Unit Description 1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 0 … 9999 Address of Dataset 4 Word 1 2 DATASET 4 WORD 2 0 … 9999 Address of Dataset 4 Word 2 3 DATASET 4 WORD 3 0 … 9999 Address of Dataset 4 Word 3 Group 92 is used as a signal "switchbox" to connect signals from Groups 1. 2 or 3 to Fieldbus dataset 4 words 1 - 3. 1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 Address selection, Group and Index, for Fieldbus dataset 4 word 1. Example: To connect signal SPEED REF3 for transmission in Dataset 4 Word 1, set parameter 92.1 = 202 . That is 202 = Group 2, Index 02. 2 DATASET 4 WORD 2 Refer to Parameter 92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 3 DATASET 4 WORD 3 Refer to Parameter 92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-59
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters7.2.35 Group 98 Option modules The Range/Unit column in Table 7-34 shows the allowable parameter values. The text following the table explains the parameters in detail. Table 7-34 Group 98 Parameter Range/Unit Description 2 COMM MODULE NO; Communication option FIELDBUS; module selection. ADVANT 3 CH3 NODE ADDR 1 ... 125 Channel 3 node address 4 CH0 NODE ADDR 1 … 125 Channel 0 node address 8 IO BOARD CONFIG NO I/O BOARD; IO board selection. IOB2; IOB3; IOB2+3; IOE; IOE+IOB2; IOE+IOB3; IOE+IOB2+3 The parameters for the option module group are set if an option module is installed. For more information on option module parameters refer to the option module manuals. 2 COMM MODULE Set to FIELDBUS if communication option module, e.g. NMBA-01 is connected to channel 0 of DCC 600. Parameters in group 51 must be set before operation. Set to ADVANT if optical “Module bus” of ADVANT controllers AC70, AC80, AC410 (CI810), AC450 (CI810), or if AC80 "Drivebus" is connected to channel 0 of DCC 600. 3 CH3 NODE ADDR Set a different node address for DDCS channel 3 in each drive, if connecting multiple drives together to Drives Window PC-tool communication (ring or star connection). 4 CH 0 NODE ADDR Set node address for AMC-DC channel 0 if connected to Advant controller optical Module bus or AC80 Drivebus (98.2 = ADVANT). The ch 0 node address is set according to the Module bus POSITION value used for this drive, by using the following conversion: If POSITION = yzw than calculate drive ch 0 node address 98.4 as y*16+zw. Example: If POSITION = 101 than Par 98.4 = 1*16+01 = 17 101 → 17, 102 → 18, … 112 → 28 201 → 33, 202 → 34, … 212 → 44 : 701 → 113, 702 → 114, … 712 → 124 If using AC80 Drivebus, ch 0 node address is set equal to Drive Number setting on ACSRX function block in AC80.7-60 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 7 - Parameters 8 IO BOARD CONFIG This parameter selects the IO boards connected to the SDCS-CON2 board. The SDCS-IOB2 and SDCS-IOB3 boards do not extend the amount of available I/O resources, but change their electrical behaviour. NO I/O BOARD IOB2 IOB3 IOB2+3 SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3 The SDCS-IOE board extends the amount of available I/O resources (+7 DI). IOE SDCS-IOE IOE+IOB2 SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB2 IOE+IOB3 SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB3 IOE+IOB2+3 SDCS-IOE + SDCS-IOB2 + SDCS-IOB3 This parameter enables the supervision of the selected I/O boards. The configuration of the available I/O resources is done by means of parameters inside the I/O-SETTINGS groups 10-14.7.2.36 Group 99 Start-up Data See Chapter 3 Start-up Data for information on these parameters.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 7-61
    • 8 Chapter 8 - Fau lt Tracing and Maintenance8.1 Overview The DCC 600 is equipped with advanced protection features that continuously guard the unit against damage and down time due to incorrect operating conditions and electrical and mechanical malfunctions. This chapter explains the DCC 600 fault tracing procedure with the CDP 312 Control Panel and 7 segment display on CON-2 board. All Warning and Fault messages (including the ones from user definable Programmable Fault Functions) are presented in this chapter, with information on the cause and remedy for each case. Fault and Warning indications are displayed in the Actual Signal Display Mode as well as in the Parameter Mode. Warnings do not have a direct effect on operation. Faults terminate motor operation. The standard maintenance measures are described in the latter part of this chapter. Most Warning and Fault conditions can be identified and cured with the information in this manual. There are, however, some situations that can only be treated by an ABB service representative. The unit is fitted with complex circuitry, and measurements, parts replacements and service procedures not described in this manual are not allowed for the user. DCS600 MultiDrive has versatile diagnostic functions in order to monitor HW-functions and to facilitate trouble-shooting. Functions are: • Thyristor diagnosis • Control board self diagnosis • Supply voltage monitoring • Watchdog • Fault logger • Data logger Diagnostic information are divided into 2 main classes. These are: ALARM An announcement that some limit is reached. Alarm does not prevent the drive to run. FAULT The drive is always tripped. Faults and alarms have a 12 character long text for the fault logger. The text language is English. Faults and alarms detected by the converter control software (inside SDCS-CON-2) have also a numerical code for display at the SDCS-CON-2 board’s 7-segment display. Codes between 0 and 99 are reserved for faults. Code numbers bigger than 100 are reserved for alarms (however, the alarm message written to the fault logger displays only the 2 least significant digits).DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-1
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance CAUTION! Do not attempt any measurement, parts replacement or other service procedure not described in this manual. Such action will void guarantee, endanger correct operation, and increase downtime and expense. WARNING! All electrical installation and maintenance work described in this Chapter 8– Fault Tracing and Maintenance should only be undertaken by a qualified electrician. Disconnect mains power if fault tracing involves work inside the frame, the motor or the motor cable. The DCC 600 can contain dangerous voltages from external control circuits. Exercise appropriate care when working on the unit. Neglecting these instructions can cause physical injury and death. WARNING! The printed circuit boards contain integrated circuits that are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Exercise appropriate care when working on the unit to avoid permanent damage to the circuits.8-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.2 Display of status, alarm and fault signalsCategories of signals and The signals (messages) to be available for thyristor power con-possibilities of display verters series DCS 600 are subdivided into four (fifth category see below) categories: General messages Starting errors F Fault signals A Alarm signals A seven segment display on the control board SDCS-CON-2 of the thyristor power converters series DCS 600 is used to show general messages, starting errors, fault and alarm signals. The signals (messages) are displayed as codes. If the codes consist of several parts, the characters/individual digits will be indicated for 0.7 sec one after the other, e.g.: 0.7s 0.7s 0.7s ⇒ ⇒ F 14 = Speed measurement fault ⇑ ⇐ ⇓ In addition to this the DCS 600 combined with the LCD of the control panel CDP 312 will be able to show the fault and alarm signals as numbers with text as well as the status signals (selected in Actual Signal Display Mode [⇒ ACT-key] by signal group 1..xx ... 6.xx). For subsequent evaluation via binary outputs or serial interfaces the 16 bit informations FAULT WORD1 [3.02], FAULT WORD2 [3.03], FAULT WORD3 [3.04] and FAULT WORD4 [3.05] as well as ALARM WORD1 [3.06] and ALARM WORD2 [3.07] contain several fault and alarm signals as a binary code.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-3
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.3 General messages From SDCS-CON-2 board The general messages will only be shown on the seven segment display/LEDs of the boards SDCS-CON-2/SDCS-AMC-DC.Code Text on Definition - Remarkseven LCD of control panelsegm. CDP 312display (or DRIVES WINDOW) 8 Not available Program is not running [SDCS-CON-2] – . Not available Normal situation, no fault / no alarm signal – L Not available Indication while loading another firmware – into the control board SDCS-CON-2From SDCS-AMC-DC board Definition Remarkgreen Software running SDCS-AMC-DC Software under operation red Fault Fault occured; Fault and Alarm Words ⇒ group 38.4 Starting errors (E) [from SDCS-CON-2 board] The starting errors will only be shown on the seven segment display of the control board SDCS-CON-2. With starting errors it will not be possible to start the drive.Code Text on Definition - Remarkseven LCD of control panelsegm. CDP 312display (or DRIVES WINDOW) E1 Not available ROM memory test error [SDCS-CON-2] – E2 Not available RAM memory test error [SDCS-CON-2] – E5 Not available No control program in memory [SDCS-CON-2] – E6 Not available Hardware is not compatible [SDCS-CON-2] –(1) Units should be switched off and on electrically; if fault occurs again, the PCBs SDCS-POW-1 and SDCS-CON-2 have to be checked and if necessary to be changed.(2) Load firmware once more.8-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.5 Fault Signals (F)The fault signals will be shown on the seven segment display of the control board SDCS-CON-2 as codes F . . as well as on the LCD of the control panel CDP 312 as numbers with text. Moreover there are fault signals which will only be shown on the LCD of the control panel. All fault signals - with the exception of F 17, F 18 and F 20 - can be reset (after elimination of the faults). For resetting (RESET) of fault signals the following steps are required: • Switching off the commands ON/OFF and RUN • Elimination of the faults • Fault acknowledgement, i.e. resetting (RESET) through input of the command RESET with APC or in ”LOCAL” mode with control panel CDP 312/DRIVES WINDOW. • Depending on the application conditions generate the com- mands ON/OFF and RUN once more. The fault signals will result in tripping the drive (installation-de- pendent). If a fault occurs, there will be three different possibilities of reaction (see column ”Remark” in the fault list): (1) Fault will switch off the signals energizing the main contactor, the field contactor and the fan contactor. (2) Fault will switch off the signals energizing the main contactor and the field contactor. (3) Fault will switch off the signal energizing the main contactor.Code Text on Definition / Status Remarkseven LCD of control panel Action Signalsegm. CDP 312 (FAULT_WORDdisplay (or DRIVES WINDOW) _1/2/3/4) F1 01 AUX UVOLT Auxiliary voltage fault 3.03 bit 0 (1) The auxiliary voltage (230 V) is too low while the drive is in operation. If resetting fails, check internal auxiliary voltages. If fault persists, change SDCS-CON-2 and/ or SDCS-POW 1 board (if required). F2 02 OVERCURR Overcurrent 3.03 bit 1 (3) Check: - Motor, load and armature cabling for faults or blocking condition; - Parameter setting of current con- trol circuit/torque limitation; - Parameter [P 42.05] (overcurrent detection). - Faulty thyristor F4 04 CONV TEMP Overtemperature power section 3.03 bit 3 (2) Check: - Fan supply, direction of rotation, fan components, air inlet and ambient temperature; -Inadmissible load cycle? -connector X12 on SDCS-CON-2DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-5
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and MaintenanceCode Text on Definition / Status Remarkseven LCD of control panel Action Signalsegm. CDP 312 (FAULT_WORDdisplay (or DRIVES WINDOW) _1/2/3/4) F5 05 EARTH FLT Earth fault (Σ IL1,IL2,IL3 differs from zero) 3.03 bit 4 (1) Disconnect the mains and verify zero voltage in armature and field circuits. Make insulation test for the complete installation. Check sum current transformer; if necessary, change transformer and SDCS-IOB-3 board. F6 06 MOT1 TEMP Overtemperature of MOTOR 1 3.03 bit 5 (2) Check: - Temperature sensor and its cabling; -Motor cooling or sizing; -Inputs for temperature sensor on board SDCS-IOB-3; -Param. setting [P 28.11] correct? F7 07 MOT1 LOAD Overload of motor 1 (Thermal model 1) 3.03 bit 6 (2) Check: - Motor temperature (let motor cool down and restart); -Motor ratings and parameters of thermal model; -Motor sizing or load cycle; -Param. setting [P 28.04] correct?F 14 14 SPD MEAS Speed feedback (measurement) fault 3.04 bit 5 (3) Check: - Incremental encoder and connec- tion cable, encoder power supply (feedback might be too low); -Tacho polarity and voltage (does a total mismatch exist?) -Position of jumper S4 on board SDCS-CON-2 O.K.? -Electronic boards SDCS-CON-2, SDCS-IOB-3, SDCS-POW 1; -Connection converter – armature circuit open? -Correct setting for selection of speed feedback monitoring?F 17 17 TYPE CODE (Converter) Type coding fault 3.04 bit 8 (1) SDCS-PIN-xx board not connected to board Can SDCS-CON-2 or SDCS-PIN-xx not coded. not be Check: - Flat cables X12 and X13 O.K.? reset -Faulty coding on SDCS-PIN-xx? -New boards SDCS-CON- 2/SDCS-AMC-DC installed? -Correct coding of unit size C4?8-6 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and MaintenanceCode Text on Definition / Status Remarkseven LCD of control panel Action Signalsegm. CDP 312 (FAULT_WORDdisplay (or DRIVES WINDOW) _1/2/3/4)F 18 18 CON FLASH Memory fault on SDCS-CON-2 board 3.05 bit 14 (1) (Parameter saving fault) Can Cause: Wrong or missing checksum, data not be error while writing or reading. reset Note: Try again saving of type coding; for that purpose -Move jumper S2 (on board SDCS-CON-2) to Pos.1–2 with electronics supply switched OFF; -Switch ON electronics again; -Select [P 15.02] = 22; -Wait until 15.02 = 0 again; -Switch OFF electronics; -Reset jumper S2 to ist original position; -Switch ON electronics again. If display shows F 18 once again, change SDCS-CON-2 board!F 20 20 CON-SYSTEM CON-SYSTEM FAULT 3.05 bit 15 (1) FAULT This fault is shown after downloading the Can software of the SDCS-AMC-DC board. not be The auxiliary voltage (230 V) has to be reset switched OFF and ON again.F 27 27 MOT2 LOAD Overload of MOTOR 2 (Thermal model 2). 3.03 bit 9 (2) {see Fault Code F 7}F 28 28 ARM OVOLT Armature (DC circuit) overvoltage 3.03 bit 2 (1) Check: - Setting of param. [P 28.22] suitable for the system configuration? -Setting of field current and actual value as well as the complete field supply (FIELD EXCITER); -Was the motor accelerated by the load? -Speed scaling [P 69.01]; -Armature voltage feedback; -Connections between SDCS- CON-2 and SDCS-PIN boards; -Coding of voltage evaluation on SDCS-PIN-xx board.F 29 29 MAIN UVLT Mains supply undervoltage (AC); setting via 3.03 bit 11 (3) parameters [P 40.01] or/ and [P 40.02] Check: - Is the mains voltage within the admissible tolerance? -Did the mains contactor close and open? -Voltage scaling via parameter [P 42.06] rated line voltage correct? -Connections between SDCS- CON-2 and SDCS-PIN-xx boards; -Coding of voltage measurement on SDCS-PIN-xx board.F 30 30 MAIN OVLT Mains supply overvoltage (AC) 3.03 bit 12 (1) Mains voltage > 130% of nominal value (parameter [P 42.06]) for longer than 10s. Fault tracing see Fault Code F 29.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-7
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and MaintenanceCode Text on Definition / Status Remarkseven LCD of control panel Action Signalsegm. CDP 312 (FAULT_WORDdisplay (or DRIVES WINDOW) _1/2/3/4)F 31 31 NO SYNC Synchronization fault (of mains) 3.03 bit 13 (3) Check: - Mains supply, fuses etc.; -Mains voltage and stability.F 32 32 FEX1 OCUR FIELD EXCITER 1 (field supply 1) overcurrent 3.03 bit 14 (1) Check: - FIELD1_OVERCUR_LEV (parameter [P 20.16]); -Connections of field exciter as well as insulation level of cable and of field winding.F 33 33 FEX1 COMM FIELD EXCITER 1 communication error 3.03 bit 15 (1) Check: - Flat cable connections X14: or cable X16: BETWEEN SDCS- CON-2 board and field exciter; -Auxil. voltage for ext. field exciter.F 34 34 CURR RIPP Armature current ripple 3.04 bit 0 (3) One or several thyristors carry no CURRENT. Check: - Current feedback with oscilloscope (6 PULSES within one cycle visible?); -Branch fuses, thyristor gate con- nection and gate-cathode resis- tance; -See also parameters [P 43.10], [P 43.11], and [P 43.12]F 35 35 FEX2 OCUR FIELD EXCITER 2 (field supply 2) overcurrent 3.04 bit 1 (1) CHECK: -FIELD2_OVERCUR_LEV (parameter [P 20.17]); -Connections of field exciter as well as insulation level of cable and of field winding.F 36 36 FEX2 COMM FIELD EXCITER 2 communication error 3.04 bit 2 (1) {SEE Fault Code F 33}F 38 38 PHAS SEQU Phase sequence fault of power section 3.04 bit 3 (3) Change supply phase sequency or make correction with parameter [P 42.01]. Attention: Direction of rotation of 3-phase fan correct?F 39 39 NO FIELD No field acknowledge from FIELD EXCITER 3.04 bit 4 (1) Check: - Do selection PARAMETERS match the field exciter (field supply)? -Field exciter supply, cable and field winding; -Status/level of acknowledge signal.F 40 40 NO E FAN No acknowledge from FAN of motor 3.04 bit 6 (1) Check: - Contactor circuit/supply for fan of motor; -Status of binary inputs/outputs (DI2/DO1) on SDCS-IOB-2/ SDCS-CON-2 boards; -Parameter setting [P 15.07].8-8 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and MaintenanceCode Text on Definition / Status Remarkseven LCD of control panel Action Signalsegm. CDP 312 (FAULT_WORDdisplay (or DRIVES WINDOW) _1/2/3/4)F 41 41 NO M CONT Missing main contactor acknowledge 3.04 bit 7 (3) Check: - SWITCH-ON/-OFF sequence correct? -Status of binary input DI3 for ac- knowledge signal ACK_M_CONT of main contactor; -Status of binary output DO3 resp. of auxiliary contactor (relay) closing the main contactor after ON/OFF command.F 42 42 FEX1 FLT FIELD EXCITER 1 (field supply 1) fault 3.04 bit 12 (1) A fault was found during self-diagnosis of field exciter. Check: - Field exciter operation; change the unit, if necessary; -Field 1/Field 2 coding O.K.?F 43 43 FEX2 FLT FIELD EXCITER 2 (field supply 2) fault 3.04 bit 13 {See Fault Code F 42}F 44 44 NO I/O Missing input/output (I/O-) board 3.03 bit 7 (1) Check: - Correct selection of SDCS-IOB-2/3 and IOE-1 boards (see also parameter [P 98.08]) - Is +/- 10 V supply available? - Flat cable connections between SDCS-CON-2 and SDCS-IOB-2/3 or IOE-1 boards.F 48 48 MOT2 TEMP Overtemperature of MOTOR 2 3.03 bit 8 Check: - Parameter setting [P 28.14] correct? {See Fault Code F 6}F 50 50 NO C FAN No CONVERTER FAN supply acknowledge 3.04 bit 10 (2) Depending on type of unit (size): Size C4 ⇒ Fault signal F 50 Sizes C1...C3 ⇒ Alarm signal A 126 Check: - Was input for acknowledge signal DI1 used?F 65 65 REVER FLT Zero current signal not reached within 6.6 ms 3.05 bit 0 (3) Very fast current rise ramp: - increase parameter REV GAP [P 43.15] *) RESET FAULT RESET of all faults which can be acknowledged *) SYSTEM FAULT Fault of the SDCS-AMC-DC board 3.05 bit 7 Fault of the operating system. Communication fault between the SDCS-AMC- Can *) CON COMMUNIC 3.05 bit 10 not be DC board and the SDCS-CON-2 board reset *) CH0 COMMUN Communication fault with fieldbus, APC or fieldbus adapters Check: -Optical fibre cable connections; -APC, PLC and adapters ready for operation?DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-9
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and MaintenanceCode Text on Definition / Status Remarkseven LCD of control panel Action Signalsegm. CDP 312 (FAULT_WORDdisplay (or DRIVES WINDOW) _1/2/3/4) *) M/F LINK Communication fault in the Master-Follower- 3.05 bit 11 link Check: - Optical fibre cable connections. *) PANEL LOSS Connection fault to the Control Panel 3.05 bit 13 CDP 312 or DRIVES WINDOW Check: - Control Panel CDP 312 discon- nected? -Connection adapter or cable damaged? -Communication problems using the program DRIVES WINDOW in ”LOCAL” mode? *) SW MISMATCH Software versions loaded to SDCS-CON-2 and 3.05 bit 9 SDCS-AMC-DC do not match *) MOT OVERSP If the speed exceeds the level determined by 3.02 bit 0 (1) MOT OVERSPEED LEV (61.2) then the drive is tripped momentarily. Check: Torque and Current limit settings Motor and motor cables Pulse encoder connections (A and B) *) TORQ FLT If SPEED ERROR during constant speed is 3.02 bit 0 (1) higher than SP DEV LEV (62.2) for time longer than TORQ FLT TD (62.3) the drive will trip for TORQ.FLT. Check: Ramp times Torque and Current limit settings Torque monitoring (Group 62) parameter settings Motor and motor cables Pulse encoder connections (A and B) *) TORQ PR FLT If torque proving is not successful, that 3.02 bit 4 (1) means torque does not reach the test level within the time TORQ PROV FLT TD (66.2), the drive will trip. (Normally only used if active load, e.g. hoist drive, with pulse encoder feedback. Check: Motor and motor cables Torque proving parameters Group 66 *) BRAKE FLT A brake fault = missing acknowledgement 3.02 bit 2 (1) (during brake release or at normal running) longer than time delay BRAKE FLT TD (Parameter 67.2) will trip the drive. Check: Brake contactor operation Wiring of digital output Brake Lift (DO4 = default) to contactor Wiring of brake acknowledgement to digital input 6 *) MAS OSC FLT If “next edge” of the communication test bit is 3.02 bit 5 (1) not received within a certain time COMTEST FLT TD (Parameter 71.1), the drive will trip. Check: Fieldbus adapter and its connection to board SDCS-AMC-DC channel 0. PLC program connection of comm. test bit from input to output. Fieldbus wiring.8-10 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and MaintenanceCode Text on Definition / Status Remarkseven LCD of control panel Action Signalsegm. CDP 312 (FAULT_WORDdisplay (or DRIVES WINDOW) _1/2/3/4) *) MF COMM ERR Master/Follower bus communication not 3.02 bit 9 (1) active. Communication test bit not received within time M/F COMM ERR TD (Parameter 72.10). Check: M/F bus connections and fibers between the Master drive channel 2 and the Follower dirve channel 2. Setting of parameter 72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE: Should be set to “MASTER” in Master drive and set to “FOLLOWER” in Follower drive. *) MF RUN FLT Both Master and Follower drive receiving 3.02 bit (1) start-order, but only one of the drives are in 14 “Running” state. Check: Setting of parameter 72.9 M/F FAULT TD. M/F bus connections and fibres *) MASTER FLT Communication between drive and Fieldbus 3.02 bit (1) adapter module not working properly longer 15 than time delay COMM FLT TME-OUT (Parameter 30.13). If this signal has to be effective only as an alarm (warning) signal, the mode of functioning can be changed by setting the parameter MASTER_FAULT_FUNC [P 30.12]. Check: Fieldbus adapter and it’s connection fibers to SDCS-AMC-DC channel 0.*)No Fault Code available on seven segment display!DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-11
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.6 Alarm Signals (A) The alarm signals will be shown on the seven segment display of the control board SDCS-CON-2 as codes A . . . On the LCD of the control panel CDP 312 the alarm signals will be shown as numbers (without the leading digit ”1”) with text. Text on LCD of Definition / Signal Remark seven control panel Possible source numbersegm. CDP 312 (ALARM_WORD_1/2)Display (or DRIVES WINDOW) Self-A 101 01 START INH Alarm: Start Inhibition 3.06 bit 0 reset- Check: - Wiring to Digital input 4 (=Electrical ting after disconnect). EN- ABLEA 102 02 EMER STOP Alarm: EMERGENCY STOP 3.06 bit 1 NOTE: Not used in DCC 600. DI5 should not be connected.A 103 03 MOT1 TEMP Alarm: Overtemperature MOTOR 1 3.06 bit 5 Check: - Parameter setting [P 28.10] correct?A 104 04 MOT1 LOAD Alarm: Overload MOTOR 1 (Thermal Model 1) 3.06 bit 6 Check: - Overload of motor - Parameter setting [P 28.03] correct?A 105 05 CONV TEMP Alarm: Overtemperature Power Section 3.06 bit 3 This signal will already appear at approx. 10 °C below the shutdown temperature applying for Fault Signal F 4 (see max. temperature [P 04.17]). Check: - See Fault Code F 4.A 118 18 MAIN UVLT Alarm: Mains Undervoltage (AC) 3.06 bit 10 Setting of undervoltage monitoring with Parameter [P 40.01] or/and [P 40.02] Check: - See also Fault Code F 29.A 120 20 CURR DEV Alarm: Armature Current Deviation 3.06 bit 13 If the current reference ARM_CUR_REF deviates from the current feedback by more than 20 % for more than 5 sec, (referenced to the rated current), this signal will be shown. Check: - Ratio between mains supply voltage and EMF8-12 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance Text on LCD of Definition / Signal Remark seven control panel Possible source numbersegm. CDP 312 (ALARM_WORD_1/2)Display (or DRIVES WINDOW)A 123 23 MOT2 TEMP Alarm: Overtemperature MOTOR 2 3.06 bit 8 Check: - Parameter setting [P 28.13] correct? See also Fault Code F 6.A 124 24 MOT2 LOAD Alarm: Overload MOTOR 2 (Thermal Model 2) 3.06 bit 9 Check: - Overload of motor - Parameter setting [P 28.07] correct?A 126 26 CONV FAN Alarm: No (Thyristor Power) Converter FAN 3.06 bit 12 Acknowledge Check: - See Fault Code F 50.A 127 27 EXT FAN Alarm: No Acknowledge from External FAN 3.06 bit 15 (of Motor) Check: - Contactor circuit/supply for fan of motor; - Status of binary inputs/outputs (DI2/DO1) on SDCS-IOB-2/ SDCS-CON-2 boards; - Parameter setting [P 15.07].A 129 29 TYPE CODE Alarm: Type Code (Hardware Code of 3.07 bit 1 Thyristor Power Converter) changed Unit type code stored in memory differs from the hardware coding. Check: - New control board SDCS- CON-2 installed? - Control board SDCS-CON-2 / SDCS-PIN-xx board inter- changed? Action: - Save values in non-volatile memory using parameter DRIVE- MODE [P 15.02] = 22.A 132 32 AUX UVOLT Auxiliary voltage alarm 3.07 bit 2 The auxiliary voltage (230 V) is too low while the drive is not in operation. For more details see Fault Code F 1.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-13
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and MaintenanceAlarm Signals referring to the SDCS-AMC-DC board Code Text on Definition / Signal Remark sevensegm. LCD of control panel Possible source numberdisplay CDP 312 (ALARM_WORD_1/2) (or DRIVES WINDOW) **) PANEL LOSS Alarm: Connection fault to the Control Panel 3.07 bit 13 CDP 312 / DRIVES WINDOW Check: - Control Panel CDP 312 discon- nected? - Connection adapter or cable damaged? **) BRAKE L FT Brake Falling time at stop longer than time 3.01 bit 13 delay BRAKE LONG FT TD (Parameter 67.5) gives a warning signal that will not trip the drive but activate Watchdog output signal, to be used for Emergency stop of crane. Check: Brake contactor. Wiring of brake acknowledgement to digital input 6. **) JOYSTICK The drive is stopped and prevented from 3.07 bit 6 start. If Stand Alone Sel (Parameter 64.1) is True and control Type (Par 64.10 is JOYSTICK Conditions: -START DIR A= “12” and START DIR B=”1” simultaneously –SPEED REF is > 1 V or TORQUE REF is >1V and ZERO POS =”1” Check: Joystick and wiring to digital imputs 2,7,8 and analogue inputs 1 or 2. Setting of parameter 64.1 (Stand Alone Sel) if using fieldbus control **) SPEED SCALE Speed scaling out of range, see parameter 3.07 bit 7 [P 69.01]. release 15.609 or later **) MOT CH BLOCK Shared motion motor change blocked. 3.07 bit 8 Supervision active if par. 16.6 (Shared motion sel) is activated and par. 16.5 (User macro ch srce) = Not sel and Rdy_run = 1 Check: That Running signal = 0 and That "Zero speed" indication signal = 1**)No Alarm Code available on seven segment display!8-14 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.7 Thyristor Diagnosis The thyristor diagnosis function is activated by the following steps: • Open the main contactor e.g. by giving STOP command and OFF command in local mode. • Set the DRIVE MODE (15.02) to 13. • Close the main contactor after max. 10 sec e.g. by giving ON command and START command in local mode. • Now the thyristor diagnosis is running: Short pulses bridge 1, alpha = 175 deg for the detection of non- blocking thyristors: The peaks of six current bubbles are recorded. If one peak value is greater than 0.26 percent of the converter nominal current, at least one thyristor is not blocking. Long pulses bridge 1, alpha = 150 deg for the detection of non- conducting thyristors: The mean values of six current bubbles are recorded. A Thyristor is recognized as non-conducting, if its current bubble mean value is below the largest of the bubbles minus three times CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 (43.11). The same with bridge 2. If a fault in the powerstage is recognized, then all pulses are suspended, and the electronics must be switched off. If no fault is detected, the drive starts running. When the thyristor diagnosis is completed, DRIVE MODE (15.02) is reset to 0 (success), or set to -1 (faulted powerstage). The result of the thyristor diagnosis can be read from COMMISS STATUS (6.02): 0 no faults, diagnosis successfully completed 10 no controller release within 10 sec 11 at least one thyristor is not blocking 12 more than one thyristor of bridge 1 is not firing 13 more than one thyristor of bridge 2 is not firing 14+i thyristor i (0...5) of bridge 1 is not firing 20+i thyristor i (0...5) of bridge 2 is not firing8.8 Supply Voltage Monitoring The control board SDCS-CON-2 monitors the following voltage levels: Supply voltage Under voltage limit +5 V +4.55 V +15 V +12.4 V -15 V - 12.0 V +24 V +19 V +48 V1 +38 V If +5 V drops below the tripping limit, it causes a master reset by hardware causing a power fail message to be displayed. The firing pulses are suppressed.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-15
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.9 Watchdog Function The control board SDCS-CON-2 contains an internal watchdog. The watchdog supervises program running on the control board. If watchdog trips the HW takes care of the next functions: • FPROM programming voltage is forced low. • Thyristor firing control is reset and disabled. • Digital outputs are forced low • Programmable analogue outputs are reset to zero, 0V.8.10 Jumpers on the SCDS-CON-2 board The jumper S2 on the SDCS-CON-2 board allows to disable the reading of parameters out of the FPROM D35. However, the storage of parameters (except type code signals 4.04, 4.05, 4.14 ... 4.17) is maintained by the drive control board AMC-DC. Thus, there is no need to change the setting of the jumper 2 at DCS600 MultiDrive (There is no effect on the parameter handling). The DCS600 MultiDrive’s software doesn’t utilize the parameter FPROM of SDCD-CON-2. Jumpers must not be removed or connected if power is on!8.11 Fault and Event Logger The fault logger collects 24 of the most recent faults into the fault buffer in the RAM memory. The faults are stored into the FLASH-memory of the drive control board AMC-DC on the beginning of an auxiliary power loss. The fault logger consists of all the available information from the drive including faults, alarms, reset and system messages.AMC Time Format and Counting Time for the loggered fault is taken from the time of a usage counter which format is 9999 hours, xx min, yy.yyyy s. However the time can be updated cyclically from the overriding system, if the system includes an overriding controller (for example APC2). Drives Window tool and CDP 312 Control Panel show this time in real date and time format.8.12 Data Logger The purpose of the Datalogger is to collect the history of signals related to an incident and stored in the drive for later retrieval and analysis. The content of the Datalogger is stored to the RAM memory. The datalogger consist of 1...4 channels. The total memory size for the datalogger is 2048 words (1word == 3 bytes). The total samples/channel depends on the data type: • Integer type signal or parameter reserves 1 word. • Real type value reserves 2 words. Example: Four real type signals are measured. The total sample/channel is 2048/(2 words x 4 channels) = 256 samples. Datalogger signals can be selected by Drives Window Tool. However, after power down / fail of the control electronics, the default values are valid.8-16 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.13 Maintenance The DCC 600 requires minimum maintenance. It is recommended that the unit be kept under more close monitoring after the start-up. There is only need for the routine check-up once operations have stabilised. The following safety instructions should be followed in the maintenance work. WARNING! The maintenance work should only be undertaken by a qualified electrician. No measurements, parts replacements or other service procedures not described in this manual should be attempted. Disconnect mains power if fault tracing involves work inside the frame, the motor or the motor cable. The DCC 600 can contain dangerous voltages from external control circuits. Exercise appropriate care when working on the unit. Neglecting these instructions can cause physical injury and death. WARNING! The printed circuit boards contain integrated circuits that are extremely sensitive to electrostatic discharge. Exercise propitiate care when working on the unit to avoid permanent damage to the circuits.8.13.1 Heatsink The heatsink fins pick up dust from the cooling air. The rate of pick-up depends on the DC converter usage and the amount and type of contamination in the ambient air. The heatsink needs regular cleaning to ensure heat dissipation. The DCC 600 can run into overtemperature Warnings and Faults if the heatsink is not cleaned regularly. In normal environment, the heatsink should be checked and cleaned annually. DC converters operating in extreme conditions will need to be cleaned more often. The best cleaning frequency must be tried out experimentally. The dust should be removed gently with a soft brush if the cleaning is carried out in the same room where the unit is normally operated. Compressed air should not be used for cleaning unless the installation can be taken apart and the cleaning is carried out in another room (or outdoors). Fan rotation should be prevented (in order to prevent bearing wear) when using compressed air for heatsink cleaning.DCC 600 Firmware Manual 8-17
    • Chapter 8 - Fault Tracing and Maintenance8.13.2 Fan The cooling fan minimum lifetime is calculated at about 60 000 hours, but in an average installation the fan is likely to operate considerably longer. The actual lifetime depends on the DC converter usage and ambient temperature. The fan is completely sealed and its lifetime cannot be prolonged with cleaning or lubrication. Fan rotation must be prevented when compressed air is used for cleaning heatsink fins. Fan failure can be predicted by the increasing noise from fan bearings and the gradual rise in the heatsink temperature in spite of heatsink cleaning. If the DC converter is operated in a critical part of a process, fan replacement is recommended once these symptoms start appearing. Fan failure will be self-evident due to the overtemperature Warnings and Faults. After the heatsink has cooled it is possible to reset the Warning/Fault and briefly operate the motor in a critical application. A replacement fan is available from ABB. Do not attempt operation with other than ABB specified spare parts. The fan can be withdrawn by removing the bottom of the frame.8-18 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • AAppendix A - Complete Parameter and Default Settings The tables in this appendix list all the actual signals, parameters, and alternative settings for the DCC 600. Use these tables as reference when you are customizing macros for your DCC 600 application. Appendixtable A-1 Actual Signals. Signal name Range/Unit Description ACTUAL SIGNALS (Group 1) 1 MOTOR SPEED rpm Selected (see parameter 50.3) motor speed value (filtered according to par. 23.5). 2 MOTOR SPEED FILT rpm Filtered (200 ms + par. 23.5) motor speed value. 3 ARM VOLT ACT V Armature voltage of the motor 4 CONV CUR ACT A Actual armature current. + : Motoring - : Generating 5 MOTOR TORQUE FILT % of motor nominal torque Filtered (par. 42.12) motor torque. 6 FIELD CUR M1 A Filtered (500 ms) field current of motor 1. 7 FIELD CUR M2 A Filtered (500 ms) field current of motor 2. 8 MAINS VOLT ACT V Actual mains voltage. 9 EMF VOLT ACT V Actual motor EMF voltage. 10 HEAT SINK TEMP deg C Temperature of the cooling element. 11 MOTOR SELECTED MOTOR 1; Motor selected. MOTOR 2 12 SPEED REF Rpm Speed reference before ramp. 13 CTRL LOCATION LOCAL; I/O CTRL; FIELDBUS; Active control location. M/F CTRL 14 TIME OF USAGE Op hours (h) Elapsed time meter. 15 CONTROL MODE SPEED CONT; Used control mode. TORQUE CONT 17 DI8-2 STATUS Status of digital inputs DI8 – DI2. 18 AN IN 1 VALUE V Value of analogue input 1. 19 AN IN 2 VALUE V Value of analogue input 2. 20 AN IN 3 VALUE V Value of analogue input 3. 21 DO8-4 STATUS Status of digital outputs. 2 24 TOTAL INERTIA Kgm Calculated inertia from power optimisation autotune 25 EXT DI15-9 STATUS Status of IOE-1 digital inputs 26 AN IN TACHO VALUE V Value of analogue tacho input. 27 SQUARE WAVE Output signal square wave gen. 28 ARM L Rel inductance of the arm circuit. 29 ARM R Rel resistance of the arm circuit. 30 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN P-gain of PI curr. Controller 31 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN Integral time constant of PI curr. Controller 32 DISCONT CUR LIMIT %Ic Curr. Level between discontinuous and continuous curr.DCC 600 Firmware Manual A-1
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Signal name Range/Unit Description INT ACTUALS (Group 2) 1 SPEED REF 2 rpm Ramp input reference limited by speed limits (parameters 20.1 & 20.2) 2 SPEED REF 3 rpm Ramp output reference 3 SPEED REF 4 rpm Total speed reference = ramp output reference + speed correction reference 4 SPEED ERROR NEG rpm Actual speed - total speed reference 5 TORQUE PROP REF %TN Speed controller proportional part output 6 TORQUE INTEG REF %TN Speed controller integration part output 9 TORQUE REF 1 %TN Torque reference input to drive (torque ramp output) 10 TORQUE REF 2 %TN Speed controller total output + acceleration compensation reference. Limited with parameters 20.4 & 20.5 11 TORQUE REF 3 %TN Output of "Torque Selector", see parameter 72.2 14 TORQ USED REF %TN Final torque reference used by torque controller (Torque ref 5 with limits) 15 MOTOR TORQUE %TN Actual motor torque 16 FIRING ANGLE Deg Thyristor firing angle (alpha) 17 MEASURED SPEED Rpm Speed measured by pulse encoder 18 POS ACT PPU +/- 32767 Position measurement value (scaled with parameter 70.1) 19 START True; False Start-order from I/O or Fieldbus 20 RUNNING True; False Drive running acknowledgment 21 BRAKE LIFT True; False Brake lift order 22 FAULT True; False Drive fault indication (tripped) 23 APPL DUTY % CPU load 24 SPEED CORR rpm Speed correction reference 25 POWOP SPEEDREF % Power optimisation calculated reference 26 REL FIELD CUR M1 % Field current of motor 1 (in percent of parameter 41.3) 27 REL FIELD CUR M2 % Field current of motor 2 (in percent of parameter 41.17) Signal name Range/Unit Description FIELDBUS WORDS (Group 3) 1 FB STATUS WORD 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Status Word, Dataset 2 Word 1, For bit details see section 5.6.12 (Hex) 2 FB FAULT WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Fault Word 1, Dataset 6 Word 1, For bit details see section 5.6.12 (Hex) 3 FB FAULT WORD 2 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Fault Word 2, Dataset 6 Word 2, For bit details see section 5.6.12 (Hex) 4 FB FAULT WORD 3 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Fault Word 3, Dataset 6 Word 3, For bit details see section 5.6.12 (Hex) 5 FB FAULT WORD 4 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Fault Word 4, Dataset 10 Word 3, For bit details see section (Hex) 5.6.12 6 FB ALARM WORD 1 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Alarm Word 1, Dataset 10 Word 1, For bit details see section (Hex) 5.6.12 7 FB ALARM WORD 2 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Alarm Word 2, Dataset 10 Word 2, For bit details see section (Hex) 5.6.12 8 FB COMMAND WORD 0 – FFFF Packed boolean Fieldbus Command Word, Dataset 1 Word 1, For bit details see section (Hex) 5.6.12 9 FB SPEED REF % Fieldbus Speed reference, Dataset 1 Word 2A-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Signal name Range/Unit Description INFORMATION (Group 4) 1 SW PACKAGE VER The name of the whole software package 2 DC VERSION Version of the loaded control sw (AMC-DC) 3 APPLIC NAME Name of the loaded FCB application sw 4 CONV NOM VOLT V Converter nominal voltage 5 CONV NOM CURR A Converter nominal current 6 FEX 1 CODE Field exciter 1 type coding 7 FEX 2 CODE Field exciter 2 type coding 8 FEX 1 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 1 9 FEX 2 SW VERSION Software revision of field exciter 2 10 BOOT SW VERSION Boot sw revision of SDCS-CON-2 11 CONV SW VERSION Converter control se revision of SDCS-CON-2 12 APPLIC VERSION Date of the loaded FCB application sw 13 BASELIB VERSION Version of the application function block library 14 CONVERTER TYPE Recognized converter type 15 QUADRANT TYPE Recognized converter quadrant type 16 CONV OVCUR LEVEL A Converter overcurrent tripping level 17 MAX BRIDGE TEMP Cels Thyristor cooler temperature tripping level 18 FEX 1 COMM STATUS Timeout status of field exc. 1 comm. link 19 FEX 2 COMM STATUS Timeout status of field exc. 2 comm. link 20 FEX 1 COMM ERRORS No. of comm. errors in field exc.1 Comm. link 21 FEX 2 COMM ERRORS No. of comm. errors in field exc. 2 comm. link 23 CON SW PRERELEASE Converter ocntrol sw pre-release of SDCS-CON-2 24 AMC SW PRERELEASE Drive control sw pre-release of SDCS-AMC-DC Signal name Range/Unit Description DRIVE LOGIC SIGS (Group 6) 1 CURR CONTROL STAT 0-FFFF Packed boolean Internal status of the current controller. (Hex) 2 COMMISS STATUS 0 … 32767 Commissioning status of the SDCS-CON-2 software. See section 3.4 for details. 5 CON2 BITS 0-FFFF Packed boolean This packed binary signal includes boolean signals from the SDCS-CON-2 (Hex) board’s software. It is read from the SDCS-CON-2 board every 8ms.DCC 600 Firmware Manual A-3
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Appendixtable A-2 Parameter Settings. Parameter Alternative Settings Default Custom Setting setting 99 START-UP DATA 99.2 APPLICATION MACRO CRANE; M/F CTRL; USER 1 LOAD; USER 1 SAVE; USER 2 LOAD; USER 2 CRANE SAVE 99.3 APPLIC RESTORE NO; YES NO 99.5 MOTOR NOM VOLTAGE 5.0 V … 1800.0 V (printed on the motor nameplate) 350.0 V 99.6 MOTOR NOM CURRENT 0.0 A … 10000.0 A (printed on the motor nameplate) 0.0 A 99.8 MOTOR NOM SPEED 20.0 rpm … 7500.0 rpm (printed on the motor nameplate) 1500.0 rpm 99.9 DEVICE NAME Name of drive section can be typed here from Drives Window tool “Device name” 10 DIGITAL INPUTS 10.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 DI6 10.2 ZERO POS SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6; EXT DI9 … EXT DI15 NOT USED 10.3 SLOWDOWN-N SEL See 10.2 NOT USED 10.4 FAST STOP-N SEL See 10.2 NOT USED 10.6 SYNC SEL NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9 …EXT DI15 NOT USED 10.8 STEP REF2 SEL See 10.2 NOT USED 10.9 STEP REF3 SEL See 10.2 NOT USED 10.10 STEP REF4 SEL See 10.2 NOT USED 10.11 HIGH SPEED SEL See 10.2 NOT USED 10.12 SNAG LOAD-N SEL See 10.1 NOT USED 10.13 ACCELERATE SEL See 10.2 NOT USED 13 ANALOGUE INPUTS 13.1 SCALE AI1 0.000 … 10.000 1.000 13.2 SCALE AI2 0.000 … 10.000 0.000 13.3 SCALE AI3 0.000 … 10.000 0.000 13.4 AN IN TACH HI VAL -32767 … 32767 30000 13.5 AN IN TACH LO VAL -32767 … 32767 -30000 14 I/O OUTPUTS 14.1 DO4 OUTPUT NOT USED; READY; RUNNING; FAULT; FAULT-N; CONTROL LOC; BRAKE LIFT BRAKE LIFT; WATCHDOG-N; USER 1 OR 2; REVERSE; MOT OVERSP; RDY FOR RUN 14.2 DO5 OUTPUT See 14.1 WATCHDOG-N 14.3 DO6 OUTPUT See 14.1 NOT USED 14.4 DO7 OUTPUT See 14.1 NOT USED 14.5 DO8 OUTPUT See 14.1 NOT USED 14.6 AN OUT 1 NOM VOLT 0 mV … 10 000 mV 10 000 mV 14.7 ANOUT 1 OFFS VOLT -10 000 mV … 10 000 mV 0 mV 14.8 AN OUT 1 NOM VAL -32768 … 32767 10 000 14.9 AN OUT 1 INDEX 0 … 19999 0 14.10 AN OUT 2 NOM VOLT 0 mV … 10 000mV 10 000 mV 14.11 ANOUT 2 OFFS VOLT -10 000 mV … 10 000 mV 0 mV 14.12 AN OUT 2 NOM VAL -32768 … 32767 10 000 14.13 AN OUT 2 INDEX 0 … 19999 0A-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Parameter Alternative Settings Default Custom Setting setting 15 DRIVE LOGIC PAR 15.2 DRIVE MODE 0 … 22 0 15.3 THERM MODEL SEL NONE; MOTOR 1; MOTOR 2; MOTOR 1 + 2 NONE 15.4 PWRLOSS TRIP IMMEDIAT; DELAYED IMMEDIAT 15.5 USED FEX TYPE 0 … 13 0 15.6 FIELD CONTRL MODE FIX; EMF; FIX/REV; EMF/REV; FIX/OPTI/REV; EMF/OPTI/REV; FIX/OPTI; FIX EMF/OPTI 15.7 EXT FAN ACK MODE TRIP; ALARM; NO SUPERVIS NO SUPERVIS 15.10 FIELD HEAT SEL DISABLED; ENABLED; ALWAYS DISABLED 15.11 FLD 1 HEAT SEL DISABLE; ENABLE DISABLE 15.12 FLD 2 HEAT SEL DISABLE; ENABLE DISABLE 15.17 MAIN SUPP OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms 200 ms 15.18 DC BREAK ACK SEL NOT USED; DI1 … DI8 NOT USED 15.19 DC BREAK OFF DEL 0 … 32767 ms 100 ms 16 SYSTEM CTR INPUTS 16.2 PARAMETER LOCK OPEN; LOCKED OPEN 16.3 PASS CODE 0 ... 30 000 0 16.4 FAULT RESET SEL NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT SEL 16.5 USER MACRO CH SRCE NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8; EXT DI9; EXT DI10; COMM MODULE NOT SEL 16.6 SHARED MOTION SEL OFF; ON; FORCE MOT 2 OFF 17 TEST GEN PAR 17.1 POT 1 -32768 … 32767 0 17.2 POT 2 -32768 … 32767 0 17.3 SQR WAVE PERIOD 10 ms … 100000 ms 10 ms 17.4 TEST REF SELECT 0; POT1; POT2; SQR WAV; TST REF 0 20 LIMITS 20.1 MINIMUM SPEED - 12 000 rpm … 0 rpm -1500 rpm 20.2 MAXIMUM SPEED 0 rpm … 12 000 rpm 1500 rpm 20.5 MAXIMUM TORQUE 0.5 %TN … 325.0 %TN 100.0 %TN 20.6 MINIMUM TORQUE -325.0 %TN … -1.0 %TN -100.0%TN 20.12 CUR LIM MOT BRIDG 0.0 %Im … 400.0 %Im 100.0 %Im 20.13 CUR LIM GEN BRIDG -400.0%Im … 400.0 %Im -100.0 %Im 20.14 MAX FIRING ANGLE 0 deg … 165 deg 150 deg 20.15 MIN FIRING ANGLE 0 deg … 165 deg 15 deg 20.16 FIELD1 OVRCUR LEV 0.0 %If1…200.0 %If1 115.0 %If1 20.17 FIELD2 OVRCUR LEV 0.0 %If2…200.0 %If2 115.0 %If2 23 SPEED CTRL 23.1 KPS 0.0 … 325.0 10.0 23.2 TIS 0 ms … 32767 ms 300 ms 23.3 DERIVATION TIME O ms … 10000 ms 0 ms 23.4 ACC COMP DER TIME 0 s … 100 s 0s 23.5 SP ACT FILT TIME 0 … 10 000 ms 0 ms 23.6 SPEED STEP (only for DW) -2457 rpm … 2457 rpm 0 rpm 24 TORQUE CTRL (not visible if par 72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE = FOLLOWER) 24.1 TORQ RAMP UP 0.00 s ... 120.00 s 0.00 s 24.2 TORQ RAMP DOWN 0.00 s ... 120.00 s 0.00 s 24.3 TORQ STEP (only for DW) -325.0 %TN … 325.0 %TN 0.0 %DCC 600 Firmware Manual A-5
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Parameter Alternative Settings Default Custom Setting setting 28 MOTOR PROTECTION 28.1 TEMP MODEL 1 TC 0 s … 5400 s 240 s 28.2 TEMP MODEL 1 CUR 0 % … 245 %Im 100 %Im 28.3 ALARM LIM LOAD I1 10 % … 130 % 120 % 28.4 TRIP LIM LOAD I1 10 % … 130 % 130 % 28.5 TEMP MODEL 2 TC 0 s … 5400 s 240 s 28.6 TEMP MODEL 2 CUR 0 % … 245 %Im 100 %Im 28.7 ALARM LIM LOAD I2 10 % … 130 % 120 % 28.8 TRIP LIM LOAD I2 10 % … 130 % 130 % 28.9 MOT 1 TEMP SEL NOT USED; 1 • PT100; 2 • PT100; 3 • PT 100; PTC; SCALED A/D NOT USED 28.10 ALARM LIM M1 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx 28.11 FAULT LIM M1 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx 28.12 MOT 2 TEMP SEL NOT USED; 1 • PT100; 2 • PT100; 3 • PT 100; PTC; SCALED A/D NOT USED 28.13 ALARM LIM M2 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx 28.14 FAULT LIM M2 TEMP -10xxx … 4000xxx 0xxx 28.18 MOT1 KLIXONSEL NOT USED; DI4; NOT USED; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT USED 28.19 EARTH CUR FLT SEL NOT USED; ACTIVATED NOT USED 28.20 EARTH CUR FLT LIM 0 A … 20 A 4A 28.21 EARTH CUR FLT DEL 0 ms … 10000 ms 10 ms 28.22 ARMAT OVRVOLT LEV 25 % … 500 % 25.0%Us…500.0%Us 150.0 %Us 28.23 SPD MEAS MON LEV 0.0 rpm … 7500.0 rpm 15.0 rpm 28.24 SPD EMF MON LEV 0.0V … 1500.0 V 50.0 V 28.25 MOT2 KLIXONSEL NOT USED; DI4; NOT USED; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT USED 30 FAULT FUNCTIONS 30.2 PANEL LOSS FAULT; NO FAULT 30.3 EXTERNAL FAULT NOT SEL; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 NOT SEL 30.12 MASTER FAULT FUNC FAULT; NO; WARNING (only visible in fieldbus mode) FAULT 30.13 COMM FLT TIME-OUT 0.10s…60.00s (only visible in fieldbus mode) 1.00s 40 UNDERVOLT MONIT 40.1 U NET MIN 1 0.0 %Us … 130.0 %Us 80.0 %Us 40.2 U NET MIN 2 0.0 %Us … 130.0 %Us 80.0 %Us 40.3 POWER DOWN TIME 0 ms … 10000 ms 5000 ms 41 MOTOR NOM VAL 41.3 MOT 1 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A … 655.3 A (on motor nameplate) 0.3 A 41.10 CUR REF SLOPE 0 %/ms … 30 %/ms 10 %/ms 41.11 ARM L 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0 41.12 ARM R 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0 41.14 FLD CUR@ 40% FLUX 0.0%If1…100.0%If1 40.0%If1 41.15 FLD CUR@ 70% FLUX 0.0%If1…100.0%If1 70.0%If1 41.16 FLD CUR@ 90% FLUX 0.0%If1…100.0%If1 90.0%If1 41.17 MOT 2 NOM FLD CUR 0.3 A … 655.3 A (on motor nameplate) 0.3 A 41.19 INT EMF REF 10.0 %Us … 146.0 %Us 105.0 %UsA-6 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Parameter Alternative Settings Default Custom Setting setting 42 MEASUREMENT 42.1 MAINS PHASE ORDER R – T – S; R – S – T R–S–T 42.5 ARM OVCUR LEVEL 20 % … 400 % 230 %Ic 42.6 NOM SUPPLY VOLT 50 V … 1400 V (Rated) or (42.08) 42.7 S CONV NOM CURR 0 A … 30000 A 0A 42.8 S CONV NOM VOLT 0 V … 2000 V 0V 42.9 S MAX BRIDGE TEMP 0 Cels … 150 Cels 0 Cels 42.10 S CONVERTER TYPE NONE; C1; C2; C3; C4 NONE 42.11 S QUADRANT TYPE NONE; 1 QUADRANT; 4 QUADRANT NONE 42.12 TORQ ACT FTC 0 ms … 30000 ms 200 ms 43 CURRENT CONTROL 43.2 ARM CUR PI P-GAIN 3.0 … 2997.0 300.0 43.3 ARM CUR PI I-GAIN 0.0 … 31968.0 3200.0 43.6 DISCONT CUR LIMIT 0.0%Ic … 100.0%Ic 50.0%Ic 43.10 CUR RIPPLE MONIT FC 1 FAULT; FC1 WARN; FC2 FAULT; FC 2 WARN FC 1 FAULT 43.11 CUR RIPPLE LIM 1 0.0 %Ic … 800.0 %Ic 0.7 %Ic 43.12 CUR RIPPLE LIM 2 0.0 %Ic … 800.0 %Ic 25.0 %Ic 43.15 REV GAP 0…50 0 44 FIELD EXCITATION 44.1 FLD ACT CUR 1 FTC 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0 44.2 P-GAIN FEX 1 0.0 … 4096.0 1.0 44.3 INTEG TIME FEX 1 0.0 … 40960.0 ms 200.0 ms 44.7 FLD ACT CUR 2 FTC 0.0 … 32767.0 0.0 44.8 P-GAIN FEX 2 0.0 … 4096.0 1.0 44.9 INTEG TIME FEX 2 0.0… 40960.0 ms 200.0 ms 44.13 FIELD 1 REF RED 0.0 % … 100.0%If1 30.0 %If1 44.17 FIELD 1 MIN TRIP 0.0 % … 100.0%If1 50.0 %If1 44.21 FIELD 2 REF RED 0.0 % … 100.0%If2 30.0 %If2 44.22 FIELD 2 MIN TRIP 0.0 % … 100.0%If2 50.0 %If2 46 EMF CONTROL 46.1 POS LIM EMF CON 0.0 % … 100.0%Fn 10.0 %Fn 46.2 NEG LIM EMF CON -100.0 … 0.0 %Fn -100.0 %Fn 46.3 EMF CON KP 1 … 32767 150 46.4 EMF CON KI 0 … 32767 5000 46.5 EMF CON BLOCK LEV 0 % … 36 % 2% 46.6 EMF ACT FILT TC 0 ms … 10000 ms 10 ms 46.9 EMF SPEED FILT TC 0 ms … 10000 ms 10 ms 46.11 V STEP -500%…500% 0% 50 SPEED MEASURING 50.2 SPEED MEAS MODE A_-B DIR; A _-_; A _-_ B DIR; A _-_ B _-_ A _-_ B _-_ 50.3 SPEED FB SEL CALC BY EMF; CON-ENCODER; NTAC MODULE; ANALOG TAC CALC BY EMF 50.4 ENCODER PULSE NR 125 … 6000 1024 51 MASTER ADAPTER (Only visible when COMM MODULE is selected, par. 98.2) 51.1 MODULE TYPE (Fieldbus module type connected) (module type) 51.2 … 51.15 (Fieldbus module parameters per connected type of module)DCC 600 Firmware Manual A-7
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Parameter Alternative Settings Default Custom Setting setting 60 LOCAL OPERATION 60.1 LOC OPER INH True; False False 60.2 LOC SPEED MAX 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 10.0 % 60.3 LOC ZERO SPEED TD 0.0 s ... 300.0 s 60.0 s 61 SPEED MONITOR 61.1 ZERO SPEED LEV 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 1.0 % 61.2 ZERO SPEED TIME 0 ms ... 10000 ms 200 ms 61.3 MOT OVERSPEED LEV 0 ... 200 % 110 % 62 TORQUE MONITOR 62.1 TORQ MON SEL True; False True 62.2 SP DEV LEV 0 ... 100 % 10 % 62.3 TORQ FLT TD 0 ... 60000 ms 600 ms 62.4 SP DER BLK LEV 0 ... 100 %/s 8 %/s 63 FAST STOP 63.1 FAST STOP TYPE 11 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1; FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3 NOT USED 63.2 FAST STOP TYPE 12 NOT USED; FAST STOP 1; FAST STOP 2; FAST STOP 3 NOT USED 64 CRANE 64.1 STAND ALONE SEL True; False True 64.2 CONTIN GEAR True; False False 64.3 HIGH SPEED LEVEL 1 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 98.0 % 64.4 DEADZONE A 0 % ... 100 % 0% 64.5 DEADZONE B 0 % ... 100 % 0% 64.6 REF SHAPE 0 ... 100 20 64.7 SLOWDOWN SPEEDREF 0 % ... 100 % 25 % 64.8 ZERO POS OK TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 0.3 s 64.9 TORQUE REF SCALE 0.00 ... 4.00 1.00 64.10 CONTROL TYPE JOYSTICK; RADIO CTRL; MOTOR POT; STEP JOYST; STEP RADIO JOYSTICK 64.11 MINIMUM REF 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 0.0 % 64.12 JOYSTICK WARN TD 0 ms ... 5000 ms 400 ms 64.13 STEP REF LEVEL 1 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 10.0 % 64.14 STEP REF LEVEL 2 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 25.0 % 64.15 STEP REF LEVEL 3 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 50.0 % 64.16 STEP REF LEVEL 4 0.0 % ... 100.0 % 100.0 % 65 LOGIC HANDLER 65.1 CONTIN ON True; False True 65.2 OFF TD 0.0 s ... 10000.0 s 180.0 s 66 TORQUE PROVING 66.1 TORQ PROV SEL True; False False 66.2 TORQ PROV FLT TD 0.0 s ...100.0 s 0.5 s 66.3 TORQ PROV REF -200.0 % ... 200.0 % 20.0 % 66.4 REGEN TEST SEL True; False True 67 MECH BRAKE CONT 67.1 BRAKE FALL TIME 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 1.0 s 67.2 BRAKE FLT TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 1.0 s 67.3 BRAKE INT ACKN True; False False 67.4 BRAKE LIFT TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 0.0 s 67.5 BRAKE LONG FT TD 0.0 s ... 60.0 s 4.0 sA-8 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Parameter Alternative Settings Default Custom Setting setting 68 POWER OPTIMIZE 68.1 POWOP SELECT True; False False 68.2 BASE SPEED 1.0 % ... 100.0 % 100.0 % 68.3 POWOP AUTOTUNE SEL True; False False 68.4 INERTIA TOTAL UP 0.00 kgm2 ... 100.00 kgm2 3.00 kgm2 68.5 INERTIA TOTAL DWN 0.00 kgm2 ... 100.00 kgm2 3.00 kgm2 68.6 TQLIM UP 0.0 % ... 200.0 % 100.0 % 68.7 TQLIM DWN 0.0 % ... 200.0 % 75.0 % 68.8 POWOP RESET LEV 0 % ... 100 % 12 % 69 REFERENCE HANDLER 69.1 SPEED SCALING RPM 0 rpm ... 5000 rpm 1500 rpm 69.2 ACC TIME FORW 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s 69.3 ACC TIME REV 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s 69.4 DEC TIME FORW 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s 69.5 DEC TIME REV 0.1 s ... 60.0 s 5.0 s 69.6 S-RAMP TC 0.0 s ... 10.0 s 0.0 s 69.7 RAMP SCALE LOCAL 0.5 ... 100.0 2 .0 69.8 SPEED REF TD 0.05 s ... 10.00 s 0.05 s 69.9 START TORQ SEL NOT USED; AUTO TQ MEM; LOAD MEAS NOT USED 69.10 RAMP RATE=1 True; False True 70 POS MEASURE 70.1 POS SCALE 1.00 ... 32767.00 PPU 100.00 PPU 70.2 SYNC COND Pos; Neg Pos 71 FIELDBUS COMM 71.1 COMTEST FLT TD 0 ms ... 32767 ms 300 ms 71.4 ADVANT COMM TYPE ENG DRIVE; STD DRIVE ENG DRIVE 72 MASTER / FOLLOWER 72.1 MAST/FOLL MODE OFF; MASTER; FOLLOWER (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) OFF 72.2 TORQUE SELECTOR ZERO; SPEED; TORQUE; MINIMUM; MAXIMUM; ADD ZERO 72.3 LOAD SHARE 0.0 % … 400.0 % (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 100.0 % 72.4 WINDOW SEL ON OFF; ON OFF 72.5 WINDOW WIDTH POS 0.0 rpm ... 12000.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 72.6 WINDOW WIDTH NEG 012000.0 rpm ... 0.0 rpm 0.0 rpm 72.7 DROOP RATE 0.00 % ... 800.00 % 0.00 % 72.8 TORQ REF A FTC 0 ms … 32767 ms (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 0 ms 72.9 M/F FAULT TD 0 ms … 32767 ms (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 200 ms 72.10 M/F COMM ERR TD 0 ms … 32767 ms (visible only if M/F CTRL macro selected) 200 ms 72.11 MF BROADCAST MODE NO; YES NO 80 SHARED MOTION (Not visible when par. 16.6=OFF) 80.1 BRAKE ACKN SEL2 NOT USED; DI2; DI6; DI7; DI8 DI8 80.2 DO4 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKE LIFT NOT USED 80.3 DO8 OUTPUT 2 NOT USED; BRAKE LIFT BRAKE LIFT 80.4 MAXIMUM TORQUE 2 0.5…325.0%TN -100.0%TN 80.5 MINIMUM TORQUE 2 -325.0…-1.0%TN -100.0%TN 80.6 CUR LIM MOT BR 2 0.0…400.0%Im 100.0%Im 80.7 CUR LIM GEN BR 2 -400.0…400.0%Im -100.0%Im 80.8 KPS 2 0.0…325.0 10.0 80.9 TIS 2 0…32767 ms 300 ms 80.10 ARM L 2 0.0…32767.0 0.0 80.11 ARM R ö2 0.0…32767.0 0.0 80.12 INT EMF REF 2 10.0…146.0%Us 105.0%UsDCC 600 Firmware Manual A-9
    • Appendix A – Complete Parameter and Default Settings Parameter Alternative Settings Default Custom Setting setting 80.13 ARM CUR PI PGAIN2 3.0…2997.0 300.0 80.14 ARM CUR PI IGAIN2 0.0…31968.0 3200.0 80.15 DISCONT CUR LIM 2 0.0…100.0%Ic 50.0%Ic 80.16 SPEED FR SEL 2 CALC BY EMF; CON-ENCODER; NTAC MODULE; ANALOG TAC CALC BY EMF 80.17 ZERO SPEED LEV 2 0.0…100.0% 1.0% 80.18 SP DEV LEV 2 0…1000% 10% 80.19 TORQ FLT TD 2 0…60000 ms 600ms 80.20 SP DER BLK LEV 2 0…100%/s 8%/s 80.21 TORQ PROV SEL 2 True; False False 80.22 POWOP SELECT 2 True; False False 80.23 BASE SPEED 2 1.0…100.0% 100.0% 80.24 SPEED SCALE RPM 2 0…5000rpm 1500rpm 80.25 ACC TIME FORW 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s 80.26 ACC TIME REV 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s 80.27 DEC TIME FORW 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s 80.28 DEC TIME REV 2 0.1…60.0 s 5.0 s 80.29 SPEED REF TD 2 0.05…10.00 s 0.05 s 80.30 START TORQ SEL 2 NOT USED; AUTO TQ MEM; LOAD MEAS NOT USED 80.31 POS SCALE 2 1.00…32767.00 PPU 100.00PPU 80.32 MOT NOM VOLTAGE 2 5.0…1800.0V 350.0 V 80.33 MOT NOM CURRENT 2 0.0…10000.0A 0.0A 80.34 MOTOR NOM SPEED 2 20.0…7500.0rpm 1500.0 rpm 80.35 DRIVE PAR RDY TD 0.0…5.0s 0.3s 92 DATASET TR ADDR 92.1 DATASET 4 WORD 1 0 … 9999 202 92.2 DATASET 4 WORD 2 0 … 9999 218 92.3 DATASET 4 WORD 3 0 … 9999 104 98 OPTION MODULES 98.2 COMM MODULE NO; FIELDBUS; ADVANT NO 98.3 CH3 NODE ADDR 1 ... 254 1 98.4 CH0 NODE ADDR 1 … 254 1 98.8 IO BOARD CONFIG NO I/O BOARD; IOB2; IOB3; IOB2+3; IOE; IOE+IOB2; IOE+IOB3; IOB2+3 IOE+IOB2+3A-10 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • B Appendix B - User I/O Interface diagrams The Figures in this appendix shows typical connections at I/O boards IOB-21, IOB-3 and IOE-1, for different control modes.IOB-3 7 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC max 5mA X4 8 GND 3 AI 1- Speed reference 4 AI 1+ 0…10V <--> 0…100% 5 AI 2- Torque reference X3 6 AI 2+ 0…10V <--> 0…Tmax 7 AI 3- Speed correction 8 AI 3+ +/- 10V <--> +/- 100% 1 AO 1+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 2 AO 1- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100% X4 3 AO 2+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 4 AO 2- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100%IOB-21 X7 3,4 +48V Power supply for IOB-21 digital inputs, 48 VDC, max. 50 mA 1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge 2 DI 2 Programmable digital input: zero position 3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge 4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect X6 5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used 6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge 7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A 8 DI 8 Digital input: Start direction B IOE-1 *) 1 DI9 Programmable digital input; Slowdown-N 2 DI10 Programmable digital input; Fast stop-N 3 DI11 Programmable digital input X1 4 DI12 Programmable digital input (24V) 5 OV for DI9-12 6 DI13 Programmable digital input 7 DI14 Programmable digital input 8 DI15 Programmable digital input 9 OV for DI13-15IOB-21 1 DO1 Relay output; Converter Fan order 2 3 DO2 Relay output; Field Exciter order 4 X4 5 DO3 Relay output; Main Contactor order 6 7 Programmable relay output; Brake lift DO4 8 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- 1 Programmable relay output; Watchdog-N DO5 2 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- X5 3 Programmable relay output DO6 4 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-Appendixfigure B-1 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Joystick control*) Optional I/O board.DCC 600 Firmware Manual B-1
    • Appendix B – User I/O Interface diagramsIOB-3 7 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC max 5mA X4 8 GND 3 AI 1- Speed reference 4 AI 1+ 0…10V <--> 0…100% 5 AI 2- Torque reference X3 6 AI 2+ 0…10V <--> 0…Tmax 7 AI 3- Speed correction 8 AI 3+ +/- 10V <--> +/- 100% 1 AO 1+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 2 AO 1- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100% X4 3 AO 2+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 4 AO 2- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100%IOB-21 X7 3,4 +48V Power supply for IOB-21 digital inputs, 48 VDC, max. 50 mA 1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge 2 DI 2 Programmable digital input: Not used 3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge 4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect X6 5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used 6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge 7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A 8 DI 8 Digital input: Start direction B IOE-1 *) 1 DI9 Programmable digital input; Slowdown-N 2 DI10 Programmable digital input; Fast stop-N 3 DI11 Programmable digital input X1 4 DI12 Programmable digital input (24V) 5 OV for DI9-12 6 DI13 Programmable digital input 7 DI14 Programmable digital input 8 DI15 Programmable digital input 9 OV for DI13-15IOB-21 1 DO1 Relay output; Converter Fan order 2 3 DO2 Relay output; Field Exciter order 4 X4 5 DO3 Relay output; Main Contactor order 6 7 Programmable relay output; Brake lift DO4 8 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- 1 Programmable relay output; Watchdog-N DO5 2 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- X5 3 Programmable relay output DO6 4 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-Appendixfigure B-2 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Radio control.*) Optional I/O board.B-2 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Appendix B – User I/O Interface diagramsIOB-3 7 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC max 5mA X4 8 GND 3 AI 1- 4 AI 1+ 5 AI 2- X3 6 AI 2+ 7 AI 3- Speed correction 8 AI 3+ +/- 10V <--> +/- 100% 1 AO 1+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 2 AO 1- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100% X4 3 AO 2+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 4 AO 2- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100%IOB-21 X7 3,4 +48V Power supply for IOB-21 digital inputs, 48 VDC, max. 50 mA 1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge 2 DI 2 Programmable digital input; Increase 3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge 4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect X6 5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used 6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge 7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A 8 DI 8 Digital input: Start direction B IOE-1 *) 1 DI9 Programmable digital input; Slowdown-N 2 DI10 Programmable digital input; Fast stop-N 3 DI11 Programmable digital input X1 4 DI12 Programmable digital input (24V) 5 OV for DI9-12 6 DI13 Programmable digital input 7 DI14 Programmable digital input 8 DI15 Programmable digital input 9 OV for DI13-15IOB-21 1 DO1 Relay output; Converter Fan order 2 3 DO2 Relay output; Field Exciter order 4 X4 5 DO3 Relay output; Main Contactor order 6 7 Programmable relay output; Brake lift DO4 8 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- 1 Programmable relay output; Watchdog-N DO5 2 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- X5 3 Programmable relay output DO6 4 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-Appendixfigure B-3 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Motor Pot. Control.*) Optional I/O boardDCC 600 Firmware Manual B-3
    • Appendix B – User I/O Interface diagramsIOB-3 7 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC max 5mA X4 8 GND 3 AI 1- 4 AI 1+ 5 AI 2- X3 6 AI 2+ 7 AI 3- Speed correction 8 AI 3+ +/- 10V <--> +/- 100% 1 AO 1+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 2 AO 1- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100% X4 3 AO 2+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 4 AO 2- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100%IOB-21 X7 3,4 +48V Power supply for IOB-21 digital inputs, 48 VDC, max. 50 mA 1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge 2 DI 2 Programmable digital input: zero position 3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge 4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect X6 5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used 6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge 7 DI 7 Digital input: Start direction A 8 DI 8 Digital input: Start direction B IOE-1 *) 1 DI9 Programmable digital input; Slowdown-N 2 DI10 Programmable digital input; Fast stop-N 3 DI11 Programmable digital input; Step ref 2 X1 4 DI12 Programmable digital input; Step ref 3 (24V) 5 OV for DI9-12 6 DI13 Programmable digital input; Step ref 4 7 DI14 Programmable digital input 8 DI15 Programmable digital input 9 OV for DI13-15IOB-21 1 DO1 Relay output; Converter Fan order 2 3 DO2 Relay output; Field Exciter order 4 X4 5 DO3 Relay output; Main Contactor order 6 7 Programmable relay output; Brake lift DO4 8 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- 1 Programmable relay output; Watchdog-N DO5 2 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- X5 3 Programmable relay output DO6 4 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-Appendixfigure B-4 Connections at Stand Alone mode, Step Joystick control.*) Optional I/O board.B-4 DCC 600 Firmware Manual
    • Appendix B – User I/O Interface diagramsIOB-3 7 VREF Reference voltage 10 VDC max 5mA X4 8 GND 3 AI 1- 4 AI 1+ 5 AI 2- X3 6 AI 2+ 7 AI 3- Speed correction 8 AI 3+ +/- 10V <--> +/- 100% 1 AO 1+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 2 AO 1- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100% X4 3 AO 2+ Programmable analogue output, factory setting: 0 4 AO 2- –10V…+10V <--> -100…100%IOB-21 X7 3,4 +48V Power supply for IOB-21 digital inputs, 48 VDC, max. 50 mA 1 DI 1 Digital input: Converter fan acknowledge 2 DI 2 Programmable digital input 3 DI 3 Digital input: Main contactor acknowledge 4 DI 4 Digital input: Electrical disconnect X6 5 DI 5 Digital input: Not used 6 DI 6 Programmable digital input; factory setting: Brake acknowledge 7 DI 7 Programmable digital input; Sync 8 DI 8 IOE-1 *) 1 DI9 Programmable digital input 2 DI10 Programmable digital input 3 DI11 Programmable digital input X1 4 DI12 Programmable digital input (24V) 5 OV for DI9-12 6 DI13 Programmable digital input 7 DI14 Programmable digital input 8 DI15 Programmable digital input 9 OV for DI13-15IOB-21 1 DO1 Relay output; Converter Fan order 2 3 DO2 Relay output; Field Exciter order 4 X4 5 DO3 Relay output; Main Contactor order 6 7 Programmable relay output; Brake lift DO4 8 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- 1 Programmable relay output; Watchdog-N DO5 2 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A- X5 3 Programmable relay output DO6 4 AC:≤ 250V~/≤3A~; DC: ≤24V-/≤3A- or ≤115/230V-/≤0.3A-Appendixfigure B-5 Connections at Fieldbus mode*) Optional I/O board.DCC 600 Firmware Manual B-5
    • ABB Automation Systems ABCrane Systems721 67 VästeråsSWEDENTelephone +46 21 34 00 00Telefax +46 21 34 02 90